Yamaha HTR-6160 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: HTR-6160

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: El manual del propietario

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

HTR-6160

Printed in Malaysia WN25460

HTR-6160

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

HTR-6160_U-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, December 10, 2007 2:07 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Caution-i En

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Caution-ii En

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

Caution-iii En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press

SYSTEM OFF to set this

unit to the standby mode, and then disconnect the AC power

plug from the AC wall outlet.

19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can

cause hearing loss.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by

SYSTEM OFF. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

English

Features ................................................................... 2

Supplied accessories .................................................. 2

Notice ....................................................................... 3

Getting started ........................................................ 4

Quick start guide .................................................... 5

Connections ........................................................... 10

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening

room (YPAO) .................................................... 32

Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 32

Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 37

Selecting the desired SCENE template to the SCENE

buttons ................................................................. 37

Creating your original SCENE templates................ 40

Using the remote control for the SCENE feature .... 41

Playback ................................................................ 42

Basic procedure ....................................................... 42

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 43

Selecting the front speaker set ................................. 43

Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 44

Displaying the current status of this unit on a video

monitor ................................................................ 44

Using your headphones............................................ 45

Muting the audio output........................................... 45

Playing video sources

in the background of an audio source.................. 45

Displaying the input source information ................. 46

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 47

Sound field programs .......................................... 48

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 48

Sound field program descriptions ............................ 48

Enjoying unprocessed input sources

(Straight decoding mode) .................................... 51

Using audio features ............................................. 52

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 52

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 52

Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 52

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 53

Overview.................................................................. 53

Basic tuning operations............................................ 53

Using station preset feature ..................................... 54

XM Satellite Radio tuning ................................... 57

Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock .................... 57

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 58

Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 58

Setting the XM Satellite Radio

preset channels .................................................... 60

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information .......................................................... 61

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning .........................62

Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 62

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

subscription ......................................................... 63

Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations ............ 63

Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

preset channels .................................................... 65

Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 65

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

information .......................................................... 67

Using iPod™ ..........................................................68

Controlling iPod™................................................... 68

Using Bluetooth™ components ............................70

Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your

Bluetooth™ component....................................... 70

Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 70

Recording ...............................................................71

Advanced sound configurations...........................72

Changing sound field parameter settings................. 72

Selecting decoders ................................................... 78

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........80

Using SET MENU ................................................... 84

1 BASIC MENU...................................................... 85

2 VOLUME MENU ................................................ 89

3 SOUND MENU.................................................... 90

4 INPUT MENU...................................................... 93

5 OPTION MENU................................................... 96

Remote control features......................................100

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

.......... 100

Setting remote control codes ................................. 102

Using multi-zone configuration..........................103

Connecting Zone 2................................................. 103

Controlling Zone 2................................................. 104

Advanced setup....................................................106

Using the advanced setup ...................................... 106

Troubleshooting...................................................110

Resetting the system............................................119

Glossary................................................................120

Sound field program information......................123

Specifications .......................................................124

Index .....................................................................126

(at the end of this manual)

Front panel................................................................i

Remote control ....................................................... ii

List of remote control codes ................................. iii

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX

“

SPEAKERS” or “

DVD” (example) indicates the name

of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to

the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for

the information about each position of the parts.

FEATURES

2 En

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω)

Front: 110 W + 110 W

Center: 110 W

Surround: 110 W + 110 W

Surround back: 110 W + 110 W

SCENE function

◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations

◆ SCENE templates for customizing capability

◆ Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support

component (some models only) working with the SCENE

function

Sound field programs

◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound

fields

◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

Digital audio decoders

◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder

◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx

decoder

◆ Neural Surround decoder

Radio tuners

◆ FM/AM tuning capability

◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using XM Mini-Tuner

and Home Dock, sold separately)

◆ SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning capability (using

SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately)

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or

high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio

based on HDMI version 1.3a (HDMI is Licensed by HDMI

Licensing, LLC.)

– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

information capability

– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability

– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability

– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals

capability

– High definition digital audio format signals capability

◆ HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System)

licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.

◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion

(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI

digital video) capability for monitor out

DOCK terminal

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such

as YBA-10, sold separately).

Other features

◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for

automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize

this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system

◆ 5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-

channel input

◆ Component video input/output capability includes

(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)

◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video

↔ component video) capability for monitor out

◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability

◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability

◆ iPod controlling capability

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes capability

◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility

◆ Bi-amplification connection capability

◆ Sleep timer

Check that you received all of the following parts.

❏ Remote control

❏ Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4)

❏ Optimizer microphone

❏ AM loop antenna

❏ Indoor FM antenna

Features

Supplied accessories

Notice

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s

Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the

most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe

level. One that lets the sound come through loud and

clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and,

most importantly, without affecting your sensitive

hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic

Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive

volume levels.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535

& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a

registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and

iPod™

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

Bluetooth™

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is

used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM

Satellite Radio Inc.

Neural Surround

™

name and related logos are trademarks owned

by Neural Audio Corporation.

the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

Notice

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the

buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote

control. In case the button names differ between the front

panel and the remote control, the button name on the

remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the

manual and product, the product has priority.

•“

SPEAKERS” or “

DVD” (example) indicates the

name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.

Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this

manual for the information about each position of the

parts.

•

The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the

corresponding reference page(s).

GETTING STARTED

4 En

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries

(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice that the operation range

of the remote control decreases.

• Do not use an old battery and a new one together.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control

code.

Getting started

Notes

Quick start guide

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. See pages 11 to 15 for

details of the speaker placement.

Prepare the following items.

❏ Speakers

❏ Front speakers ...................................x 2

❏ Center speaker ..................................x 1

❏ Surround speakers ............................ x 4

Select magnetically shielded speakers. The

minimum required speakers are two front speakers.

The priority of the requirement of other speakers is

as follows:

1. Two surround speakers

2. Center speaker

3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)

❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1

Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA

input jack.

❏ Speaker cables ....................................... x 7

❏ Subwoofer cable .................................... x 1

Select a monaural RCA cable.

❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1

Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital

audio output jack and composite video output

jack.

❏ Video monitor ......................................... x 1

Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector

equipped with a composite video input jack.

❏ Video cable .............................................x 2

Select an RCA composite video cable.

❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1

You can also connect two subwoofers to this unit. In this

case, prepare two active subwoofers and subwoofer cables.

Quick start guide

Front right

speaker

Subwoofer

Surround back

right speaker

Surround left

speaker

Front left

speaker

Surround back left

speaker

Surround right

speaker

Center

speaker

Video monitor

DVD player

Enjoy DVD playback!

Step 1: Set up your speakers

☞

P. 6

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button

☞

P. 7

☞

P. 8

Preparation: Check the items

Quick start guide

6 En

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the

room.

2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.

Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.)

cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker.

Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

3 Connect each speaker cable to the

corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel

(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Front speakers and center speaker

Surround and surround back speakers

4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack of this unit

and the input jack of the subwoofer.

You can also connect another subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT 2 jack.

Step 1: Set up your speakers

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

120V 80Hz

100W MAX. TOTAL

0.8A MAX. TOTAL

AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT PRE OUT DOCK VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

DIGITAL INPUT

ANTENNA

REMOTE

SIRIUS

TRIGGER

OUT

SPEAKERS

DVDSUBWOOFERFRONTSB (8CH) ZONE 2

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUR. BACKSURROUND

SINGLE CENTERCENTERFRONT (8CH)

SURROUND

DVD

DTV/CBL

S VIDEO

VIDEO

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVRMONITOR OUT

VCR

OUTININ OUT

1 2

DVD

DVDCDDTV/CBL

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DVD

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMPSURROUND

SINGLE

CENTERFRONT A

+12V

15mA MAX.

GND

FRONT B/ZONE B/

ZONE 2/PRESENCE

DTV/CBLDVD

MD/

CD-R

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

OUTININ OUT

IN OUT

MONITOR

OUT

UNBAL.

321

IN2IN1

EXTRA SP

A B

75Ω

Speaker terminals

PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 jack

12 3 4

Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are

unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables

together to prevent short circuits.

Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each

other.

Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any

metal part of this unit.

To the front left

speaker

To the front right

speaker

To the center speaker

Loosen Insert Tighten

To the surround

right speaker

To the surround

back left speaker

To the surround

left speaker

To the surround

back right speaker

PRE OUT

DOCK

DVD

SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK

ROUND

SINGLE

CENTER

S VI

VID

SUBWOOFER PRE

OUT 1 jack

Subwoofer cable

Input jack

AV receiverSubwoofer

Quick start guide

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the

digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD

player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL

jack of this unit.

2 Connect the video cable to the composite

video output jack of your DVD player and

DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.

3 Connect the video cable to the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video

input jack of your video monitor.

4 Connect the power plug of this unit and other

components into the AC wall outlet.

This unit is equipped with AC OUTLETS for the power

supply of the other components. See page 28 for details.

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

120V 80Hz

100W MAX. TOTAL

0.8A MAX. TOTAL

AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT PRE OUT DOCK VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

DIGITAL INPUT

ANTENNA

REMOTE

SIRIUS

TRIGGER

OUT

SPEAKERS

DVDSUBWOOFERFRONTSB (8CH) ZONE 2

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUR. BACKSURROUND

SINGLE CENTERCENTERFRONT (8CH)

SURROUND

DVD

DTV/CBL

S VIDEO

VIDEO

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVRMONITOR OUT

VCR

OUTININ OUT

DVD

DVDCDDTV/CBL

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DVD

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMPSURROUND

SINGLE

CENTERFRONT A

+12V

15mA MAX.

GND

FRONT B/ZONE B/

ZONE 2/PRESENCE

DTV/CBLDVD

MD/

CD-R

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

OUTININ OUT

IN OUT

MONITOR

OUT

UNBAL.

321

IN2IN1

EXTRA SP

A B

Ω

Make sure that this unit and the DVD

player are unplugged from the AC

wall outlets.

DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack DVD VIDEO jack

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack

DVD

AUDIO

DIGITAL INPUT

SPEAKERS

SB (8C

FRONT (8C

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

CENTER

FRONT A

FRONT B/ZONE B/

ZONE 2/PRESENCE

DVD

-R

OUT

(REC)

DTV/CBL

DVR

VCR

IN O

IN1

EXTRA SP

Digital coaxial

audio output

jack

Digital coaxial audio

cable

DVD DIGITAL

INPUT COAXIAL

jack

DVD player

AV receiver

DOCK

VIDEO

COMPONENT

DVD

DTV/CBL

S VIDEO

DEO

DVR

OUT

Composite

video output

jack

Video cable

DVD VIDEO jack

DVD player

AV receiver

■ For further connections

• Using the other kind of speaker combinations

☞ P. 11

• Connecting a video monitor via various ways of the

connection ☞ P. 20

• Connecting a DVD player via various ways of the

connection ☞ P. 21

• Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video

recorder ☞ P. 22

• Connecting a set-top box ☞ P. 22

• Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder or a

turntable ☞ P. 23

• Connecting an external amplifier ☞ P. 24

• Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-channel

audio connection ☞ P. 25

• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth adapter ☞ P. 25

• Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ☞ P. 26

• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel

☞ P. 26

• Connecting a FM/AM antenna

☞ P. 27

• Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock

☞ P. 57

• Connecting the SiriusConnect tuner

☞ P. 62

VIDEO

COMP

ONENT VIDEO

DVD

DTV/CBL

DVR

VCR

OUT

ININ

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

Video monitor

AV receiver

Video cable

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

jack

Video input jack

Quick start guide

8 En

1 Turn on the video monitor and then set the

input source selector of the video monitor to

this unit.

2 Press

SCENE1 button.

This unit is turned on. “DVD Viewing” appears in the

front panel display, and this unit automatically

optimize own status for the DVD playback.

The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while

this unit is in the SCENE mode.

3 Start playback of the desired DVD on your

player.

4 Rotate

VOLUME to adjust the volume.

When you change the input source or sound field program,

the SCENE mode is deactivated.

■ About SCENE function

Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can turn on this

unit and recall your favorite input source and sound field

program according to the SCENE template that has been

assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are

built combinations of input sources and sound field

programs.

If you connect a Yamaha product that has capability of the

SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the

component and start playback. Refer to the instruction manual of

the DVD player for further information.

■ The default assigned SCENE templates

You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in

advance. See page 22 for details.

You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this

unit in advance. See page 27 for details.

You must tune into the desired radio station in advance. See

pages 53 to 56 for tuning information.

To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected

AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the

indoor FM antenna.

You can change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE

buttons. See page 37 for details.

Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button

Check the type of the connected speakers.

If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to

“6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 28). 4 ohm

speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see

page 106).

Note

Default

SCENE

button

The name of the SCENE template

and its description

SCENE

DVD Viewing

– input source: DVD

– sound field program: Straight

For when you want to listen to a music disc from

the connected DVD player as the background

music for this room.

SCENE

Disc Listening

– input source: DVD

– sound field program: 7ch Stereo

For when you want to listen to a music disc from

the connected DVD player as the background

music for this room.

SCENE

TV Viewing

– input source: DTV/CBL

– sound field program: Straight

For when you want to watch a TV program.

SCENE

Radio Listening

*2, *3, *4

– input source: TUNER

– sound field program: 7ch Enhancer

For when you want to listen to a music program

from the FM radio station.

Note

Quick start guide

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

■ After using this unit...

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to

the standby mode.

This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small

amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from

the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby

mode, press the desired

SCENE buttons

(or

SCENE) or

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

(or

POWER). See page 29 for details.

What do you want to do with this

unit?

■ Customizing the SCENE templates

• Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 37

• Creating your original SCENE templates

☞ P. 40

■ Using various input sources

• Basic controls of this unit ☞ P. 42

• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 53

• Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs ☞ P. 57

• Enjoying SIRIUS Satellite Radio programs

☞ P. 62

• Using your iPod with this unit ☞ P. 68

• Using the Bluetooth components ☞ P. 70

■ Using various sound features

• Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 48

• Using the pure direct mode for high

fidelity sound ☞ P. 52

• Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 72

■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit

• Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters

for your listening room (AUTO SETUP) ☞ P. 32

• Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit

☞ P. 80

• Setting the remote control ☞ P. 100

• Adjusting the advanced parameters ☞ P. 106

■ Additional feature

• Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 47

CONNECTIONS

10 En

TRIGGER OUT jack

This is control expansion jack for custom installation.

Connections

Rear panel

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

120V 80Hz

100W MAX. TOTAL

0.8A MAX. TOTAL

AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT PRE OUT DOCK VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

DIGITAL INPUT

ANTENNA

REMOTE

SIRIUS

TRIGGER

OUT

SPEAKERS

DVDSUBWOOFERFRONTSB (8CH) ZONE 2

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUR. BACKSURROUND

SINGLE CENTERCENTERFRONT (8CH)

SURROUND

DVD

DTV/CBL

S VIDEO

VIDEO

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVRMONITOR OUT

VCR

OUTININ OUT

DVD

DVDCDDTV/CBL

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DVD

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMPSURROUND

SINGLE

CENTERFRONT A

+12V

15mA MAX.

GND

FRONT B/ZONE B/

ZONE 2/PRESENCE

DTV/CBLDVD

MD/

CD-R

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

OUTININ OUT

IN OUT

MONITOR

OUT

UNBAL.

321

IN2IN1

EXTRA SP

A B

75Ω

12 34567

89 0 A

Name Page

1 XM jack

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

SIRIUS jack

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

2 AUDIO jacks

DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks

17-23

3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks

4 ZONE2 OUT jacks

103

5 PRE OUT jacks

6 DOCK terminal

7 Video component jacks

(VIDEO and S VIDEO)

17-22

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

17-22

8 ANTENNA terminals

9 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

0 Speaker terminals

11-16

A HDMI jacks

B AC OUTLETS

11 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and

multi-channel audio sources.

■ 7.1-channel speaker layout

7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback the sound of high definition audio formats (Dolby

TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 14

for connection information.

We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See page 13 for

details.

Front left and right speakers

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the

ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a

center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

Surround left and right speakers

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.

Surround back left and right speakers

The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.

Subwoofer(s)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity

sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. You can connect one or

two subwoofer(s) to this unit. When you use two subwoofers, you can enjoy deeper bass sound. The position of the

subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer

near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.

When you use two subwoofers, select the same type of the subwoofer as another and set these subwoofers as same sound characteristics.

Place each subwoofer at the same distance from the listening position. The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 is the same

as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack.

Placing speakers

SBR

SBL

60˚

30˚

80˚

SBL

SBR

Speaker indications

FL/FR: Front left/right

C: Center

SL/SR: Surround left/right

SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right

SW: Subwoofer

30 cm (12 in) or more

12 En

Connections

■ 6.1-channel speaker layout

See page 14 for connection information.

We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the

effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See

page 13 for details.

Front left and right speakers

Center speaker

Surround left and right speakers

Subwoofer(s)

The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as

those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 11).

Surround back speaker

Connect a single surround speakers to the SURROUND

BACK SINGLE speaker terminal and place the single

surround back speaker behind the listening position. The

surround back left and right channel signals are mixed

down and output at the single surround back speaker when

you set “SUR.B L/R SP” to “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see

page 86).

■ 5.1-channel speaker layout

See page 14 for connection information.

We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the

effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See

page 13 for details.

Front left and right speakers

Center speaker

Subwoofer(s)

The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as

those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 11).

Surround left and right speakers

Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND

speaker terminals even if you place the surround speakers

behind the listening position. For the smooth and

unbroken sound field behind the listening position, place

the surround left and right speakers farther back compared

with the placement in the 7.1-channel speaker layout. The

surround back channel signals are directed to the surround

left and right speakers when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to

“NONE” (see page 86).

60˚

30˚

80˚

Speaker indications

FL/FR: Front left/right

C: Center

SL/SR: Surround left/right

SB: Surround back

SW: Subwoofer

60˚

30˚

80˚

Speaker indications

FL/FR: Front left/right

C: Center

SL/SR: Surround left/right

SW: Subwoofer

For other speaker combinations

You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the 7.1/

6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations.

Use the automatic setup feature (see page 32) or set the “SPEAKER SET” parameters in “MANUAL SETUP” (see

page 85) to output the surround sounds at the connected speakers.

13 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Using presence speakers

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front and surround back speakers with extra ambient effects

produced by the sound field programs (see page 48). You can adjust the vertical position of dialogues with using the

presence speakers (see page 73).

To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to the EXTRA SP terminal (see page 14) and set “EXTRA SP

ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see pages 33 and 85).

PRPL

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

1.8 m

(6 ft) or

higher

Speaker indications

FL: Front left

FR: Front right

C: Center

PL: Front presence left

PR: Front presence right

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

1.8 m

(6 ft) or

higher

14 En

Connections

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,

groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable

to the “–” (black) terminals.

■ For the 7.1-channel speaker setting

Connecting speakers

Caution

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage

this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front

panel display when you turn on this unit.

• Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 28). 4 ohm

speakers can be also used as the front speakers. For details about the speaker impedance setting, see page 106.

Note

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

120V 80Hz

100W MAX. TOTAL

0.8A MAX. TOTAL

AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT PRE OUT DOCK VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

DIGITAL INPUT

ANTENNA

REMOTE

SIRIUS

TRIGGER

OUT

SPEAKERS

DVDSUBWOOFERFRONTSB (8CH) ZONE 2

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUR. BACKSURROUND

SINGLE CENTERCENTERFRONT (8CH)

SURROUND

DVD

DTV/CBL

S VIDEO

VIDEO

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVRMONITOR OUT

VCR

OUTININ OUT

DVD

DVDCDDTV/CBL

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DVD

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMPSURROUND

SINGLE

CENTERFRONT A

+12V

15mA MAX.

GND

FRONT B/ZONE B/

ZONE 2/PRESENCE

DTV/CBLDVD

MD/

CD-R

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

OUTININ OUT

IN OUT

MONITOR

OUT

UNBAL.

321

IN2IN1

EXTRA SP

A B

75Ω

Front speakers

(FRONT A)

Surround speakers

Subwoofers

Right

Center speaker

Surround back speakers

Left

Right

EXTRA SP terminals

Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B), front speaker systems in another room

(ZONE B), presence speakers, or Zone 2 speakers. To select the function of the speakers connected

to the EXTRA SP terminals, set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see

page 85).

You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals in “AUTO

SETUP” (see page 33).

(optional)

15 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ For the 6.1-channel speaker setting

■ For the 5.1-channel speaker setting

Surround back speaker

AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT PRE OUT DOCK

HDMI

DIGITAL INPUT

RIGGER

OUT

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFERFRONTSB (8CH) ZONE 2

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUR. BACKSURROUND

SINGLE CENTERCENTERFRONT (8CH)

SURROUND

DVD

DVDCDDTV/CBL

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DVD

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMPSURROUND

SINGLE

CENTERFRONT A

mA MAX.

FRONT B/ZONE B/

ZONE 2/PRESENCE

DTV/CBLDVD

MD/

CD-R

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

OUTININ OUT

321

IN2IN1

EXTRA SP

Surround speakers

EXTRA SP terminals

(see page 14)

Left (SINGLE)

Center speaker

LeftRight

Front speakers

(FRONT A)

LeftRight

Subwoofers

(optional)

AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT PRE OUT DOCK

HDMI

DIGITAL INPUT

RIGGER

OUT

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFERFRONTSB (8CH) ZONE 2

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUR. BACKSURROUND

SINGLE CENTERCENTERFRONT (8CH)

SURROUND

DVD

DVDCDDTV/CBL

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DVD

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMPSURROUNDCENTERFRONT A

mA MAX.

FRONT B/ZONE B/

ZONE 2/PRESENCE

DTV/CBLDVD

MD/

CD-R

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

OUTININ OUT

321

IN2IN1

EXTRA SP

SINGLE

Surround speakers

EXTRA SP terminals

(see page 14)

Center speaker

LeftRight

Front speakers

(FRONT A)

LeftRight

Subwoofers

(optional)

16 En

Connections

■ Connecting the speaker cable

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist the exposed wires of the

cable together to prevent short circuits.

2 Loosen the knob.

3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side

of each terminal.

4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting the banana plug

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding

terminal.

■ Using bi-amplification connections

This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections

to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-

amplification.

To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT

and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP terminals as shown

below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set

“BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see

page 109).

When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the

shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the

instruction manuals of the speakers for details.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Caution

Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers

to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high

pass filter) crossovers.

Note

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

FRONT A

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

SINGLE

This unit

Left

Right

Front speakers

17 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect one of the type of the audio jack(s) and/or video jack(s) that your input components are equipped with.

■ Audio jacks

This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other

components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals

input at the COAXIAL jack. Optical input jacks are compatible

with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your video

monitor.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and

chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate

wires of S-video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component video signals, separated into the

luminance (Y) and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals

transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See

pages 19 and 97 for details.

Information on jacks and cable plugs

Note

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

Audio jacks and cable plugs

(Red)(White) (Orange)

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

YR P B P

Composite

video cable

plug

S-video

cable plug

Component

video cable

plugs

Video jacks and cable plugs

(Yellow) (Green)(Blue)(Red)

18 En

Connections

■ HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio

signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio

sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the

following connections:

– multi-channel analog audio input (see page 25)

– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)

• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source

component, and set the component appropriately.

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video

and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of

the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input

source component appropriately so that the component outputs

the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the

bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied

instruction manuals for details.

• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features

(for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet)

of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the

audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the

following resolutions:

Video signal format

– 480i/60 Hz

– 576i/50 Hz

– 480p/60 Hz

– 576p/50 Hz

– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

Default input assignment of HDMI input jacks

■ HDMI jack and cable plug

• We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5

meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of

the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of

this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt

playback or cause noise.

• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the

HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to

establish the connection to the component.

• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video

and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be

output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”

in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 97) to activate this feature.

Information on HDMI™

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

media

2ch Linear

PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch

Linear PCM

8ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, Blu-

ray Disc, HD DVD,

etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch,

2.8224 MHz, 1 bit

SA-CD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital,

DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High

definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD,

Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master

Audio, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

Blu-ray Disc,

HD DVD, etc.

Notes

HDMI input jack Assigned input source

IN1 DVD

IN2 DTV/CBL

Notes

HDMI

HDMI cable plug

19 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Audio signal flow

• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks can be output at

the HDMI OUT jack only when “S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”

(see page 98).

• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the

AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

■ Video signal flow

• When the video signals are input at the HDMI, COMPONENT

VIDEO, S VIDEO, and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the

input signals is as follows:

1. HDMI

2. COMPONENT VIDEO

3. S VIDEO

4. VIDEO

• Digital video signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks cannot

be output from analog video output jacks.

• The analog component video signals with

480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted to the

S-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution

are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks.

Audio and video signal flow

Notes

HDMI

AUDIO

OutputInput

Analog output

Digital output

Notes

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

Output

Input

Video conversion ON (see page 97)

20 En

Connections

Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,

the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the

S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.

• You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or

on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT

jack of this unit. Use the “S.AUDIO” parameter in “OPTION

MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio

signals (see page 98).

• When you use the internal tuner of the TV as the input source,

connect the digital or analog audio output jacks of the TV and

digital or analog audio input jacks of this unit. Refer to

“Connecting a set-top box” on page 22 for connecting

information.

• If a video monitor is connected to this unit via a DVI

connection, you may not take full advantage of the HDMI

features.

• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI

connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals

being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the

HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.

• If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic

audio and video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync

feature), this unit adjusts the audio and video timing

automatically (see page 92). Connect the video monitor to the

HDMI OUT jack of this unit to use the feature.

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

Notes

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

120V 80Hz

100W MAX. TOTAL

0.8A MAX. TOTAL

AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT PRE OUT DOCK VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

DIGITAL INPUT

SPEAKERS

DVDSUBWOOFERFRONTSB (8CH) ZONE 2

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUR. BACKSURROUND

SINGLE CENTERCENTERFRONT (8CH)

SURROUND

DVD

DTV/CBL

S VIDEO

VIDEO

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVRMONITOR OUT

VCR

OUTININ OUT

DVD

DVDCDDTV/CBL

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DVD

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMPSURROUNDCENTERFRONT A

FRONT B/ZONE B/

ZONE 2/PRESENCE

DTV/CBLDVD

D-R

OUT

(REC)

DTV/CBL DVR VCR

OUTININ OUT

MONITOR

OUT

321

IN2IN1

EXTRA SP

A B

PRPB

TV (or projector)

Video in

Component video in

S-video in

HDMI in

Optical out

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

(One for the video connection, and one for the

audio connection)

21 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 97), be sure

to make the same type of video connections as those made for

your TV (see page 20). For example, if you connected your TV

to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

AUDIO OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

VIDEOS VIDEO

1234

OPTICAL

AUDIO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

Game console or

video camera

Optical output

Video output

S-Video output

Audio output

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

(One for the video connection, and

one for the audio connection)

27 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals. In general, these antennas should provide

sufficient signal strength.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,

install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna

The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity

and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND

terminal.

Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna

Connecting the FM and AM

antennas

Notes

ANTENNA

REMOTE

SIRIUS

TRIGGER

OUT

GND

UNBAL.

75Ω

Indoor FM

antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the

antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth

ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.

AM loop antenna

(supplied)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33

ft) vinyl-covered wire

extended outdoors from a

window.

Open the lever

Insert

Close the lever

28 En

Connections

■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)

Use these 2 outlets to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the power cable of your other

components to these 2 outlets. Power to these 2 outlets is

supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to

these 2 outlets is cut off when this unit is turned off. For

information on the maximum power or the total power

consumption of the components that can be connected to

these 2 outlets, see “Specifications” on page 124.

The power to AC OUTLETS of this unit is not cut off while this

unit is charging connected iPod even when this unit is in the

standby mode. When this unit completes charging or the iPod is

disconnected, the power is cut off automatically when this unit is

in the standby mode.

1 Press

SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to

turn off this unit.

See page 29 for details.

2 Press and hold

TONE CONTROL and

then press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn

on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

“SP IMP.”.

“SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting

(“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display.

4 Press

TONE CONTROL repeatedly to

select “6Ω MIN”.

5 Press

SYSTEM OFF to save the new

setting and turn off this unit.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

Connecting the power cable

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

120V 80Hz

100W MAX. TOTAL

0.8A MAX. TOTAL

DVRMONITOR OUT

To the AC wall outlet

Setting the speaker impedance

Caution

If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to

“6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm

speakers can be also used as the front speakers.

Note

TONE CONTROL

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

While holding

down

29 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Turning on this unit

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or

POWER) to

turn on this unit.

The main zone is turned on.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be delay for a few

seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.

• You can also turn on the main zone by pressing

SCENE (or

SCENE) buttons.

■ Set the main zone to the standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

(or

STANDBY

)

to set the main zone to the standby mode.

In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

Press

SYSTEM OFF to set the main zone and Zone 2 (see

page 104) to the standby mode simultaneously.

Turning this unit on and off

30 En

Connections

HDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is

input at the HDMI IN jacks (see page 18).

ADAPTIVE DRC indicator

Lights up when the adaptive dynamic range control

feature is turned on (see page 89).

DOCK indicator

• Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha

iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see

page 25) and V-AUX is selected as the input source.

The DOCK indicator also lights up when this unit is

charging the battery of the stationed iPod in the

standby mode.

• Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter

(such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth

component is in the paring or the Bluetooth adapter is

searching the Bluetooth component (see page 70).

• Light up while the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter is

connected to the Bluetooth component (see page 70).

ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

selected (see page 50).

Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

The XM and SIRIUS indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A.

and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator

or SIRIUS indicator lights up only when “XM” or “SIRIUS” is

selected as the input source.

YPAO indicator

Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the

speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without

any modifications (see page 32).

Tuner indicators

Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM, XM Satellite

Radio, or SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning mode (see

pages 53 to 67).

96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator

• The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function

is on (see page 45).

• Indicates the current volume level.

Input signal indicators

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) or DSD (Direct Stream Digital) digital audio

signals.

Decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of this unit function.

The neural indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and

Canada models and CSII indicator is only applicable to

the U.S.A. model.

Sound field indicators

Light up to indicate the active sound fields (see page 48).

Headphone indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 45).

Front panel display

MUTE

VOL.

DSD

neural

PCM

96/24

VIRTUAL

AUTO

YPAO

MEMORY

TUNED

STEREO

HOLD

SLEEP

MULTI CH

VCR DVR

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

DVD CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER SIRIUS

MATRIX DISCRETE

MASTER AUDIO

ADAPTIVE DRC

DOCK ENHANCER

SILENT

CINEMA

ZONE 2

A B

PL x

LFE

LL C R

SL SB SR

SBRSBL

TRUE HD

DIGITAL PLUS

IHGED FCA B0

123456789

Note

Presence sound field

Listening position

Surround left

sound field

Surround right

sound field

Surround back sound field

31 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers activated

(see page 43).

SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated.

SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated.

SP A B: The FRONT A and FRONT B speakers are

activated.

ZONE2 indicator

Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 104).

DSP indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound

field programs are selected (see page 48).

CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound

field program (see page 48).

VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is

active (see page 51).

SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a

sound field program is selected (see page 51).

Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 47).

Input channel and speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

• Indicate the channel components of the current

digital input signal.

• Light up or flash according to the settings of the

speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup

procedure (see page 32) or in the “BASIC MENU”

in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 87).

Presence speaker indicators

Light up or flash according to the setting of “EXTRA

SP ASSIGN” when this unit is in the automatic setup

procedure (see page 32) or in the “BASIC MENU” in

“MANUAL SETUP” (see page 85).

You can make settings for the presence and surround back

speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see

page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for “SUR.B L/R

SP” (see page 86) in “SPEAKER SET”.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

I1Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 102.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

Input channel indicators

LFE

LL C R

SL SB SR

SBRSBL

LFE indicator

Presence speaker indicators

Using the remote control

Notes

30 30

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Remote control sensor

OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM (YPAO)

32 En

This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid

troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as

possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If

there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

• Initial settings are indicated in bold.

• You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that

appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual

uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• Before performing operations, press

AMP.

• This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker

terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment.

1 Make sure of the following check points.

Before starting the automatic setup, check the following

check points.

❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.

❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on.

❏ This unit is selected as the video input source of

the video monitor.

❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the

volume level is set to about half way (or slightly

less).

❏ The crossover frequency controls of the

connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.

❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.

If you connect two subwoofers to this unit, the volume level

of each subwoofer is set to slightly less.

2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

“MIC ON View OSD menu” appears in the front

panel display.

The following menu screen appears on the video

monitor.

3 Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would

be when you are seated in your listening position. You can

use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer

microphone to the tripod (etc.).

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

Using AUTO SETUP

Notes

Note

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

Controls of a subwoofer (example)

VIDEO AUX

OPTIMIZER MIC

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUDIO

OPTICAL

Omni-directional

microphone

AUTOSETUP

ZONEBPRESENCE

. EXTRASPASSIGN

>ZONE2 FRONTB

[]/[]:Select

NONE

SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL

START

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

Optimizer microphone

33 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

PREPARATION

English

4 Press

l / h to select the desired setting

for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press

Extra speaker assignment

EXTRA SP ASSIGN

Selects the function of the speakers connected to the

EXTRA SP terminals.

Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, ZONE B,

PRESENCE, NONE

• When you use the alternative front speaker

system (see page 43)

Select “FRONT B”.

• When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see

page 104)

Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers

to the Zone 2 speakers. This unit drives the Zone 2

speakers by using the internal amplifier.

• When you want to use another front

speaker system in Zone B

Select “ZONE B”.

• When you use the presence speakers (see

page 13)

Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the

speakers to the presence speakers.

• When you do not use the EXTRA SP

terminals

Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP

terminals.

If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 109), you cannot

select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.

5 Press

l / h to select “SETUP” and then

press

Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT

• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO

SETUP” settings and override the previous

settings.

• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”

settings and restore the previous settings.

• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”

parameters to the initial factory settings.

• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have

previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.

• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change

the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see

page 109) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “BASIC MENU”

(see page 85).

6 Press

l / h to select the desired setting of

“EQ”.

Parametric equalizer type EQ

Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified

frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the

crucial frequency bands for the listening room and

adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to

create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can

select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment

from the following choices.

Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT

• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency

response of all speakers with higher frequencies

being all speakers to achieve more natural sound.

Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little

harsh.

• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response

of all speakers. Recommended if all of your

speakers are of similar quality.

• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response

of each speaker in accordance with the sound of

your front speakers. Recommended if your front

speakers are of much higher quality than your other

speakers.

Note

Notes

34 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

7 Press

n to select “START” and then press

ENTER to start the setup procedure.

The following message appears in the OSD.

When this unit starts the automatic setup procedure,

loud test tones are output at the speakers.

For more accurate measurements, keep quiet and

move to the wall where speakers are not around. We

recommend that you leave the listening room during

the automatic setup procedure.

Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts

the automatic setup procedure.

8 Press

ENTER to start the automatic setup

procedure.

The following screen appears in the OSD and setup

procedure starts in 10 seconds.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker during

the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the

“RESULT” display appears in the OSD.

• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

• We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit

is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3

minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.

Press

k to cancel the automatic setup procedure.

9 Make sure that the following screen appears

and then press

ENTER to display the

result screen.

The results displayed under “RESULT” are as

follows:

Number of speakers SP

Displays the number of speakers connected to this

unit in the following order:

Front/Back/Subwoofer

Speaker distance DIST

Displays the speaker distance from the listening

position in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

Speaker level LVL

Displays the speaker output level in the following

order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output

level

• The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 jack

is the same as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE

OUT 1 jack. Therefore, even if you connect two

subwoofers, the number of the connected subwoofer is

indicated as “0.1”.

• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing

procedure, restart from step 4.

• If you selected other than “AUTO” in step 5, no test tones

are output.

• If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure,

the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen

appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on

page 36.

• When this unit detects potential problems during the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the

number of warning messages appears in the above of

“RESULT” (see page 36).

• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR

PHASE:REV” appears during the automatic procedure

and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see

page 87) is automatically set to “REVERSE”.

Notes

NOTICE

output. 

Loudtesttonesare

 



Pleasekeepquiet

orleavetheroom.

Press[ENTER]

AUTOSETUP



MeasurementStart

in 9seconds

[RETURN]:Cancel

Notes

AUTOSETUP

 RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

. SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AUTOSETUP



Measurement Complete

Press [ENTER]

35 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

PREPARATION

English

10 Press

k and then

ENTER to display the

setup results in detail.

11 Press

l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the setup result displays.

Press

k / n to toggle between the parameters in a

results.

If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually

adjust each parameter, use “MANUAL SETUP” (see

page 80).

• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may

be longer than the actual distance depending on the

characteristics of your subwoofer.

• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the

same frequency to provide finer adjustments.

12 Press

ENTER to return to the top

result display.

13 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”

and “CANCEL” and then press

l / h to

select “SET” or “CANCEL”.

Choices: SET, CANCEL

• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

14 Press

ENTER to confirm your selection.

The following screen appears. Disconnect the

optimizer microphone from this unit. The optimizer

microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from

direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.

AUTOSETUP

. RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Detail

RESULT WIRING

FRONT L;;;;;;;OK

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

Results of the speaker

connection and wiring

(WIRING)

Results of the speaker distance

from the listening position

(DISTANCE)

Results of the setting of each

speaker size

(SIZE)

Results of the parametric

equalizer of each speaker

(EQ)

Results of the speaker output level

(LEVEL)

Notes

AUTOSETUP

 RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

. SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AUTOSETUP

 RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

. SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AUTOSETUP

[MENU]:Exit

AUTOSETUPComplete

Disconnect Microphone

PRESS [ENTER]

36 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

15 Press

ENTER to confirm your selection.

The top “SET MENU” screen appears in the OSD.

16 Press

MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your

listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate

your system.

■ If an error screen appears

Press

k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or

“EXIT” and then press

ENTER.

The following display is an example when “E-9:USER

CANCEL” appears in the OSD.

Choices: RETRY, EXIT

• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

If “E-5:NOISY” appears, “PROCEED” also appears in the

choices. When you select “PROCEED”, this unit continues the

measurements and settings, but the settings may not be optimal.

■ If “WARNING” appears

When this unit detects potential problems during the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the

top result display. Check the warning messages to correct

your speaker settings.

Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at

“WARNING” and then press

ENTER to

display the detailed information about the

warning.

The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates

the number of warning messages.

2 Press

l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the warning displays.

• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO

SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 117.

• When the corresponding warning message is not

applicable to a speaker, “––” is displayed instead.

• If “SWFR: TOO LOUD” or “SWFR: TOO LOW” appears

in the “W-3: LEVEL ERROR” display, adjust the volume

level of the subwoofer(s).

3 Press

ENTER to return to the top result

display.

SET MENU

.;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

.A;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

ERROR

. E-9:USER CANCEL

Don't operate

any function

>RETRY EXIT

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

[

Note

AUTOSETUP

RESULT

. WARNING(3)

>SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Detail

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

WARNING

W-1:OUTOFPHASE

Reverse Channel

FL --

CENTER

PL PR

SL SR

SBL SBR

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES

37 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit is equipped with 18 preset SCENE templates for

various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory

setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to

each SCENE button (see page 8):

SCENE 1: DVD Viewing

SCENE 2: Disc Listening

SCENE 3: TV Viewing

SCENE 4: Radio Listening

If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select

the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template

library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE

buttons on the front panel and the remote control.

1 Press and hold the

SCENE (or

SCENE)

button for 3 seconds.

The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the

front panel starts to flash, and the name of the

currently assigned SCENE template appears in the

front panel display.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press

AMP and then press

l / h) to select the

desired template.

3 Press the

SCENE (or

SCENE) button

again to confirm the selection.

The selected SCENE template is assigned to the

SCENE button.

Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the

corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input

source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See

page 41 for details.

Selecting the SCENE templates

Selecting the desired SCENE

template to the SCENE buttons

SCENE template library

(Image)

Select the desired SCENE

template

Assign the

SCENE

template to the

SCENE button

DVD Viewing

Remote control

Flashes

3 seconds

Front panel

Note

DVD MovieView

Remote control

Front panel

38 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?

When iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth adapter, this unit

plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal.

You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 40 for details.

Note

Radio Listening

CD Hi-fi Listening

CD Listening

CD Music Listening

XM Listening

Dock Listening

DVD Live Viewing

DVD Movie Viewing

DVD Viewing

Disc Hi-fi Listening

Music Disc Listening

Disc Listening

DVR Viewing

TV Viewing

Action Game Playing

RPG Playing

DVD

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

TUNER (FM/AM)

DOCK

DVD

DVR

Video sources

(DVD video,

Recorded video)

TV programs

Video games

iPod or Bluetooth

component

Radio programs

Music discs (CD, SA-

CD or DVD-Audio)

SCENE templates

Which component do you

like for playback?

Which source do you like to

play back?

Default

SCENE buttons

TV Sports Viewing

SIRIUS

SIRIUS Listening

39 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions

The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons in the default setting.

When the connected DVD player or CD player has the capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to the REMOTE

OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features.

SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features

DVD Viewing

DVD

Straight

Select this SCENE template when you play back general

contents on the DVD player.

DVD Movie Viewing

DVD

MOVIE

Sci-Fi

Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on

your DVD player.

DVD Live Viewing

DVD

ENTERTAINMENT

Music Video

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live

video on your DVD player.

DVR Viewing

DVR MOVIE

Drama

Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on

your digital video recorder.

Disc Hi-fi Listening

DVD

Pure Direct

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity

sound of the music discs on your DVD player.

Music Disc

Listening

DVD

STEREO

2ch Stereo

Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs

on your DVD player.

Disc Listening

DVD

STEREO

7ch Stereo

Select this SCENE template when you play back music

sources on your DVD player as the background music.

CD Hi-fi Listening

Pure Direct

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity

sound of the music discs on your CD player.

CD Listening

STEREO

7ch Stereo

Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs

on your CD player.

CD Music Listening

STEREO

2ch Stereo

Select this SCENE template when you play back music source

on your CD player as the background music.

Radio Listening

TUNER MUSIC ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio

programs.

XM Listening

XM MUSIC ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy XM Satellite

Radio programs.

SIRIUS Listening

SIRIUS MUSIC ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy SIRIUS Satellite

Radio programs.

Dock Listening

V-AUX MUSIC ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you play back music on

your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth component that is connected to the Bluetooth

adapter.

TV Viewing

DTV/CBL Straight

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general

programs on your TV.

TV Sports Viewing

DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs

on your TV.

Action Game

Playing

V-AUX ENTERTAINMENT

Action Game

Select this SCENE template when you play action games such

as car racing and FPS games.

RPG Playing

V-AUX ENTERTAINMENT

Roleplaying Game

Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing

games.

40 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

You can create your original SCENE templates for each

SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 18 SCENE

templates to create the original SCENE templates.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press and hold the desired

SCENE button

for 3 seconds.

The SCENE template customizing screen appears on

the video monitor.

When the SCENE template you want to customize is not

assigned to any of the

SCENE buttons, press

l / h

repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the

menu screen.

3 Press

k / n to select the desired parameter

of the SCENE template and then

l / h to

select the desired value of the selected

parameter.

You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE

template:

• INPUT: The input source component.

• MODE: The active sound field programs,

“Straight” or “Pure Direct” mode.

4 Press the

SCENE button again to confirm

the edit.

An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE

template.

• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the

corresponding

SCENE buttons, you need to set the input

source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See

page 41 for details.

• You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE

button, and if you create another customized SCENE template,

this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with

the new one.

• The newly created template is only available for the assigned

SCENE button.

■ Rename the SCENE templates

Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3

of “Creating your original SCENE templates” and

then press

ENTER.

•Press

k / n to select the desired character.

•Press

l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the

space or the desired character.

•Press

RETURN to cancel the new name.

•Press

ENTER to confirm the new name.

Creating your original SCENE

templates

Note

: DVD Viewing

: DVD

SCENE

INPUT

SCENE : DVD Viewing

SCENE template library

(Image)

Select the desired SCENE

template

Assign the SCENE

template to the

SCENE button

Create an original SCENE

template



[RETURN]:EXIT

[SCENE1]:SET

[ENTER]:Rename



MODE:STRAIGHT

INPUT: DVD

.pDVDViewing[



SCENE1

[

Notes



[RETURN]:CANCEL

[ENTER]:SET

[p]/[[]:Position

[]/[]:Character



 



DVDViewing

RENAME

SCENE1

[

41 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Controlling the input source

components in the SCENE mode

You can operate both this unit and the input source

component by using the remote control. You must set the

appropriate remote control code for each input source in

advance (see page 102).

1 Press the desired

SCENE button on the

remote control.

2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below

to control the input source component of the

selected SCENE template.

These buttons control the input source component. See

page 100 for details of the function of each button.

■ Setting input source of the customized

SCENE template on the remote control

If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE

template, you must set the input source of the SCENE

template on the remote control to operate the input source

component correctly.

Press and hold the

SCENE button and the

desired input selector button (

) for 3 seconds.

Press the

SCENE button again to operate the input source

component.

Using the remote control for the SCENE feature

Note

REC

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

PARAMETER

MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

ENHANCER

l PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

MUTE

POWER

4321

ENT

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

VCR B

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

MEMORY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

AXMSIRIUS

INFO

SCENE buttons

PLAYBACK

42 En

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

See page 46 to display the input source information on the

video monitor.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (4)) to select

the desired input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.

The corresponding input selector button on the remote

control for the currently selected input source lights up for

approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the

remote control, showing which source component is

currently being operated.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

• See page 53 for details about FM or AM tuning

instructions.

• See page 58 for details about XM Satellite Radio

tuning instructions.

• See page 63 for details about SIRIUS Satellite

Radio tuning instructions.

• See page 68 for details about iPod operations.

• See page 70 for details about Bluetooth component

operations.

Rotate

VOLUME

(or press

VOLUME +/–

)

to adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

• See page 52 to adjust the level of each speaker.

• This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.

• You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume

level (see page 89).

5 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or press

PROG l / h repeatedly) to select the

desired sound field program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display. See page 48 for details

about sound field programs.

Sound field programs cannot be selected when the

component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is

selected as the input source (see page 43).

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically

selects the last sound field program used with the

corresponding input source.

• To display information about the currently selected sound

field program in the OSD, see page 72 for details.

Playback

Caution

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play

back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,

you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player

supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound

output level of your CD player before you play back a

CD encoded in DTS.

To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio

connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to

“DTS” before the playback (see page 94).

Before performing the following operations, press

AMP on

the remote control.

Basic procedure

MULTI CH

VCR DVR

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

DVD CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER SIRIUS

 DVD

Currently selected input source

Available input sources

Note

Sci-Fi

Currently selected sound field program

43 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 25) as the input

source.

Rotate the

INPUT selector to select “MULTI

CH” (or press

MULTI CH IN).

“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.

Use “MULTI CH” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the

parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 95).

Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input

source.

Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT

A and/or FRONT B) on or off.

Press

SPEAKERS on the front panel

repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front

speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or

EXTRA SP speaker terminals.

The active front speaker set changes as follows.

• FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, “ZONE 2” or

“NONE” (see page 85).

• Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front

speaker setting.

■ Using the Zone B feature

When you set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE B” (see

page 85

), you can use the speakers connected to the

EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room (Zone B).

Press

SPEAKERS on the front panel

repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.

When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in

the main room are muted.

If you select the sound field program and activate the Zone B

speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically (see

page 51).

Before performing the following operations, press

AMP on

the remote control.

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

component

Note

Selecting the front speaker set

Notes

Note

FRONT A

FRONT B

FRONT A

and

FRONT B

OFF

44 En

Playback

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this

feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input

jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to the

same input source.

• We recommend that you set the audio input jack select to

“AUTO” in most cases.

• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by

using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98).

Press

AUDIO SELECT (or

AUDIO SEL)

repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack

select setting.

This feature is not available when no digital input jacks

(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,

HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when

the HDMI IN jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in

“INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see

page 93).

You can display the operating information of this unit on a

video monitor.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press

DISPLAY on the remote control.

The current status screen appears in the OSD.

• You can select the amount of time that the current status is

displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter

in “OPTION MENU” (see page 96).

• To turn off the status screen, press

DISPLAY again.

The OSD signal is not output at the DVR and VCR VIDEO

OUT jacks and will not be recorded.

Before performing the following operations, press

AMP on

the remote control.

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT)

AUDIO SELECT Function

AUTO

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) HDMI

(2) Digital signals

(3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI

signals are not input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL

jack

(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL

jack

When no signals are input, no sound is

output.

ANALOG

Selects only analog signals. If no analog

signals are input, no sound is output.

Note

MULTI CH

VCR DVR

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

DVD CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER SIRIUS

A.SEL:AUTO

Currently selected audio input jack select setting

Available input sources

Displaying the current status of

this unit on a video monitor

Note



 



A.SEL:HDMI

INPUT:DVD



Sci-Fi

MOVIE

[DISPLAY]:STATUSOFF

STATUSVOL:-40.0dB

45 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo

analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode

activates automatically (see page 51).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

speaker terminals.

• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

Press

MUTE on the remote control to mute the

audio output.

Press

MUTE again to resume the audio output.

• You can also rotate

VOLUME (or press

VOLUME +/–) to

resume the audio output.

• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”

parameter in “VOLUME MENU” (see page 89).

• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the

audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel

display when the audio output is resumed.

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Press the input selector buttons (

) on the

remote control to select a video source and then

an audio source.

• You can also select “MULTI CH” as the audio source (see

page 43). Press

AMP and then press

MULTI CH IN.

• Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the

desired setting to select the default background video input

source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 95).

Using your headphones

Notes

Muting the audio output

VOLUME

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT

SCENE

AUDIO SELECT OPTIMIZER MIC

EFFECT

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

PRESET/TUNING/CHBANDSPEAKERS MEMORY INFO MUTE SLEEP

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

AUDIO OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

VIDEOS VIDEO

1234

Before performing the following operations, press

AMP on

the remote control.

Playing video sources in the

background of an audio source

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

XM SIRIUS

VCR

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL DVR

VCR

DVD

MULTI CH IN

Audio sources

Video sources

Audio sources

46 En

Playback

You can display the audio and video information of the

current input signal.

1 Press

AMP and then press

MENU on

the remote control.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL

INFO” and then press

ENTER.

The audio information about the input source appears

in the OSD.

3 Press

l / h to toggle between the audio

and video information displays.

4 Press

MENU on the remote control again

to exit from “SET MENU”.

■ Audio information

“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

■ Video information

“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

HDMI error and message

Displaying the input source

information

Information Descriptions

FORMAT

Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to

analog input.

SAMPLING

The number of samples per second taken from

a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

CHANNEL

The number of source channels in the input

signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a

multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front

channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

BITRATE

The number of bits passing a given point per

second.

FLAG

Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or

PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically

switch decoders (“Surround EX”, etc.).

SET MENU

.;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

.A;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

Notes

Information Descriptions

HDMI SIGNAL

Type of the source video signals and

the video signals output at the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit.

HDMI RES.

Resolution of the input signal (analog

or HDMI) and the output signal

(HDMI). When input video signals are

composite video or S-video signals,

the input video signals are indicated as

“Composite” or “S-Video”.

ANALOG RES.

Resolution of the analog video signals

output at the COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.

HDMI ERROR

(HDMI MESSAGE)

Error message for HDMI sources or

connected HDMI devices.

Note

Message Cause

DEVICE OVER

The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

HDCP ERROR

HDCP authentication failed.

Out of Res.

Out of resolution. The connected monitor is

not compatible with the resolution of the

input video signal.

47 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLETS (see page 28).

Even if this unit is in the standby mode, this unit does not cut off

the power to AC OUTLETS while charging connected iPod (see

page 28).

Press

AMP and then press

SLEEP

repeatedly to set the amount of time.

Each time you press

SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the

amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is

set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound field

program.

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press

SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly

until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel

display.

The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”

disappears from the front panel display after a few

seconds.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY (or

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF) to set the main

zone to the standby mode.

Using the sleep timer

Note

SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min.

Flashes

SLEEP

Straight

Lights up

SLEEP OFF

Disappears

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

48 En

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing

(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or press

AMP and then press

PROG l / h

repeatedly).

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 43).

• When you play back the Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

sources, this unit does not activate any sound field program.

• When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher

than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.

Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.

■ For audio music sources

For audio music sources, we also recommend that you use the Pure Direct mode (see page 52).

• The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 85).

CLASSICAL

Sound field programs

Selecting sound field programs

Notes

Sound field program descriptions

Notes

Program Descriptions

Hall in Munich

This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish

wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the

center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is

traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all

around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It

offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

49 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

LIVE/CLUB

■ For various sources

• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 85).

ENTERTAINMENT

■ For movie sources

You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 77 for details.

• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 85).

MOVIE

Program Descriptions

Cellar Club

This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound

field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The

listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line

This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The

floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

Notes

Program Descriptions

Sports

This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with

enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned

clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the

listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.

Action Game

This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the

reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment

with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of

directions.

Roleplaying Game

This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field

effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of

the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.

Music Video

This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The

listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the

vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that

reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Notes

Program Descriptions

Standard

This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original

acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the

concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from

the left, right and rear.

Spectacle

This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.

It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an

excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and

special effects-featuring movies.

You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation

between dialog, sound effects and background music.

50 En

Sound field programs

The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

STEREO

■ The Compressed Music Enhancer

MUSIC ENHANCER

■ Surround decode mode

SUR. DECODE

Adventure

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.

The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded

widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation

between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.

Drama

This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious

dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling,

reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center

positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.

Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an

atmosphere of a good old movie theater.

The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a

comfortable space with a certain sound depth.

Note

Program Descriptions

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit

downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates

a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

Program Descriptions

Straight Enhancer

Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-

channel compression artifacts.

7ch Enhancer

Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

Program Descriptions

Sur. Decoder

Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on

multi-channels. See page 78 for details.

Program Descriptions

51 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Using sound field programs without

surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

When you set “SUR. L/R SP”

to “NONE” (see page 86),

Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever

you select a sound field program (see page 48).

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 86) in the following cases:

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

– when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode.

■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and

sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA

activates automatically whenever you connect headphones

to the PHONES jack while listening to sound field

programs (see page 48). When activated, the SILENT

CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 43).

• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “Pure Direct” (see

page 52) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 50) is selected, or

when this unit is in the “Straight” mode (see page 51).

When this unit is in the “Straight” mode, 2-channel stereo

sources are output from only the front left and right

speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into

the appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) to select

“Straight”.

■ Deactivating the “Straight” mode

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) so that

“Straight” disappears from the front panel

display.

The sound effect is turned back on.

Note

Notes

Before performing the following operation, press

AMP on

the remote control.

Enjoying unprocessed input

sources (Straight decoding mode)

USING AUDIO FEATURES

52 En

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in

“AUTO SETUP” (see page 32) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 87).

1 Press

LEVEL on the remote control and

then

k / n repeatedly to select the speaker

you want to adjust.

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the

setting of the speakers.

• When the video monitor is turned on, the “LEVEL”

adjustment menu appears in the video monitor.

2 Press

l / h to adjust the speaker output

level.

• Press

h to increase the value.

• Press

l to decrease the value.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

3 Press

LEVEL to turn off the speaker level

adjustment display.

Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity

sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode

is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with

the least circuitry.

Press

PURE DIRECT (or

PURE DIRECT)

to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.

The

PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up

while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel

display automatically dims.

• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in

the Pure Direct mode:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the OSD

– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level

settings)

– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)

• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this

unit is turned off.

The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation

is performed.

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front left and right speaker channels.

Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.

1 Press

TONE CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency

response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency

response (BASS).

2 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to adjust

the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or

the low-frequency response (BASS).

Control range: –6 dB to +6 dB

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency

sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround

speakers may not match.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is

selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input

source.

Using audio features

Before performing the following operations, press

AMP on

the remote control.

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

Display Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

SBL

Surround back left speaker

SBR

Surround back right speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

PRNS L

Presence left speaker

PRNS R

Presence right speaker

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Notes

Adjusting the tonal quality

Notes

FM/AM TUNING

53 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can use two tuning modes to tune into the desired FM/AM station:

Frequency tuning mode (AUTO TUNING/MANUAL TUNING)

You can search or specify the frequency of the desired FM/AM station automatically or manually (see “Basic tuning

operations” on this page).

Preset tuning mode (PRESET TUNING)

You can preset the desired FM/AM station in advance, and then recall the station by specifying the preset group and

number (see “Using station preset feature” on page 54).

Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press

TUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

2 Press

BAND (or

BAND) to select the

reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) to select the desired tuning mode.

Automatic tuning mode (AUTO TUNING)

Use this feature when the signal from the station you

want to select is strong.

When this unit is in the automatic tuning mode,

“AUTO TUNING” appears in the front panel display

for a moment. The AUTO indicator appears in the

front panel display.

Manual tuning mode (MANUAL TUNING)

Use this feature if the signal from the station you

want to select is weak and you cannot tune by using

the automatic tuning. When this unit is in the manual

tuning mode, “MANUAL TUNING” appears in the

front panel display for a moment.

Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches

the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal

quality.

Preset tuning mode (PRESET TUNING)

Use this feature to recall the preset stations. When

this unit is in the preset tuning mode, “PRESET

TUNING” appears in the front panel display for a

moment. Frequency tuning is not possible. See

page 54 for details.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to tune into

the desired station.

•Press

h (or

k) to tune into a higher

frequency.

•Press

l (or

n) to tune into a lower frequency.

FM/AM tuning

Overview

Note

Basic tuning operations

Before performing the following operations, press

TUNER

on the remote control.

AUTO

AFM 88.9MHz

Lights up

No colon (:)

AFM 88.9MHz

No colon (:)

54 En

FM/AM tuning

• When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator

lights up.

• Hold down the button to continue searching when this unit is in

the manual tuning mode.

• Press

INFO (or

INFO) repeatedly to toggle the frequency

information and sound field program information in the front

panel.

■ Direct frequency tuning

Use this feature tune into the desired station directly by

entering the frequency.

1 Press

BAND on the remote control

repeatedly to select the desired reception

band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

2 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “AUTO TUNING”

or “MANUAL TUNING”.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, manual

tuning is not possible. Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH MODE) to turn the colon (:) off.

3 Enter the frequency of the desired station by

pressing the numeric buttons (

Example: To tune into 103.7 MHz

If the entered frequency is out of the range of the FM/AM tuning,

“WRONG STATION!” appears in the front panel display and

then this unit automatically tunes into the last selected station.

Use this feature to store up to 40 stations FM/AM stations

(A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset

station groups). Preset the desired stations to this unit by

using the automatic or manual preset tuning features in

advance (see “Automatic station preset” and “Manual

station preset” on page 55).

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

TUNING”.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired

preset station number (A1 to E8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display along with the station band and

frequency.

You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing

A/B/C/D/E (or

A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.

Before performing the following operations, press

TUNER

on the remote control.

AFM 88.9MHz

No colon (:)

Using station preset feature

Before performing the following operations, press

TUNER

on the remote control.

A1:FM 88.9MHz

Preset group and preset station number

55 En

FM/AM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Automatic station preset

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in

order.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press

TUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

2 Press

BAND (or

BAND) to select “FM”

as the reception band.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press and hold

MEMORY (or

MEMORY) for more than 3 seconds.

The preset station number as well as the MEMORY

and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5

seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current

frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the

MEMORY indicator disappears.

• You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores

FM stations. Press

A/B/C/D/E (or

A-E/CAT. l / h) and

then

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly after you perform step 3

to select the preset station number under which the first station

will be stored.

• To cancel the automatic station preset, press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY) again.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is

cleared when you store a new station under the same preset

station number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for

all the available stations and copy the stored stations to the rest

preset station numbers.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength or an AM radio station,

tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual

station preset” below.

■ Manual station preset

Use this feature to store the AM or FM stations with weak

signals manually.

1 Tune into a station.

See page 53 for tuning instructions.

2 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 30 seconds.

To cancel the preset memory mode, press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY) again.

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select a

preset station group and number (A1 to E8)

while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

•Press

h (or

k) to select a higher preset

station group and number.

•Press

l (or

n) to select a lower preset station

group and number.

You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing

A/B/C/D/E (or

A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.

4 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY) while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset station group and

number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is

cleared when you store a new station under the same preset

station number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

Before performing the following operations, press

TUNER

on the remote control.

Notes

AUTO

MEMORY

A1:FM 88.9MHz

Flashes

Flash

Notes

MEMORY

Flashes

MEMORY

A1:FM 88.9MHz

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

Flashes

56 En

FM/AM tuning

■ Exchanging preset stations

You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using

A/B/C/D/E

and

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

See “Using station preset feature” on page 54.

2 Press and hold

EDIT for more than 3

seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

Select preset station “A5” using

A/B/C/D/E

and

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

See “Using station preset feature” on page 54.

4 Press

EDIT again.

“EXCHANGE E1-A5” appears in the front panel

display and the assignments of the two preset stations

are exchanged.

Before performing the following operations, press

TUNER

on the remote control.

MEMORY

E1:FM 88.9MHz

Flashes

MEMORY

A5:FM 88.9MHz

Flashes

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

57 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

XM Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in premier sports, news, talk radio,

stand-up comedy, children’s and entertainment programming. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio quality from

coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan.

The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

■ Enjoying XM HD Surround content

This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM

Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience (see page 78).

Connect the XM Mini-Tuner and the XM Dock (sold

separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.

For details, see the operating instructions provided with

the XM Mini-Tuner Dock.

To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,

the XM Mini-Tuner Dock must be placed at or near a southerly

facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can

mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”

information in the front panel or “XM Information” screen in the

video monitor (see page 61) to check the antenna reception level

and adjust the orientation of the antenna.

If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM TUNER” appears in

the front panel display, the connection and setting of the antenna,

Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not correct (see page 114).

XM Satellite Radio tuning

XM Satellite Radio online information

For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/

For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/

Note

XM READY

legal disclaimer

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM

service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any

technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees

and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent

explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XM-RADIO (US

residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial- free channels and advertising-

supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer

Agreement available at www.xmradio.com (US residents) and www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48

their respective owners.

Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock

ANTENNA

SIRIUS

XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock

(sold separately)

Note

58 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock,

inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to

your XM Ready

home audio system, and installed the

antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving

XM programming. There are three places to find your

eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-Tuner, on

the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0.

Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares

for reference.

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at

http://activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-

967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada

online at https://activate.xmradio.ca/ or call 1-877-GET-XMSR

(1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will

send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup.

Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy

periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio

system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup

on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press

XM) to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio

information (such as channel number, channel name,

category, artist name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel appears in the front panel display.

When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio”

section in “Troubleshooting” on page 110 for appropriate

remedies.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on page 59.

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on page 59.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” on page 59.

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access

mode” on page 59.

• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD

surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in

multi-channels (see page 78).

• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see

page 60).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front

panel display or in the OSD (see page 61).

Activating XM Satellite Radio

Note

Basic XM Satellite Radio

operations

Notes

MULTI CH

VCR DVR

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

DVD CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER SIRIUS

001Preview

Lights up

59 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n).

• To display the XM Radio ID number displayed in the front

panel display, select channel “0”.

■ Category Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n).

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset

channels” on page 60.

The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is “001

Preview”.

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (

■ Direct number access mode

1 Press

SRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons (

) as shown below.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (

) on the remote control and then press

ENT to confirm the input number.

• Instead of pressing

ENT to tune into the channel

immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms

the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (

) or

ENT

cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.

Before performing the following operations, press

XM.

60 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

on page 59.

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on

page 58 for details.

2 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 30 seconds.

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 4 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select

a preset channel group and number (A1 to

E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing

A/B/C/D/E (or

A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.

4 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY) to set

the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a

preset channel while the MEMORY indicator

is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in

the same preset channel group and number is cleared.

Before performing the following operations, press

XM.

Setting the XM Satellite Radio

preset channels

Note

043XMU

Currently selected channel number

MEMORY

Flashes

Note

MEMORY

C5 043XMU

Selected preset channel group and number

Flashes

C5:043XMU

Colon (:)

61 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such

as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,

or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front

panel display or in the OSD.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 110 for appropriate remedies.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press

INFO (or

INFO) repeatedly to toggle

between the following XM Satellite Radio

information display modes.

Back to “CHANNEL INFO”

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM

Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a

continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by

using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 96).

• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

• To hold the current XM Raido information, press

ENTER on

the remote control while it is being displayed. The HOLD

indicator flashes in the front panel display while you are

holding the XM information. Press

ENTER again to release

the held information.

• When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Dock cannot receive

the signals, “NO SIGNAL” appears in the front panel display.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD

Press

DISPLAY.

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

[1] Search mode (see page 58)

[2] Channel category

[3] Song title

[4] Antenna reception level

[5] Channel number/name

[6] Artist name

• To turn off the OSD, press

DISPLAY again.

• XM status messages also appear in the OSD.

• You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio

information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-

SOURCE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 96).

• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information, press

ENTER

on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD.

“HOLD” appears in the screen while you are holding the XM

information. Press

ENTER again or change the XM Satellite

Radio channel to release the held information.

• The current XM Satellite Radio reception level appears on the

top of the XM Satellite Radio information screen. For the best

reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna of Home Dock

so that “ ” or “ ” is displayed here. “ ” is displayed if

the antenna cannot receive the signals correctly. In this case,

adjust the orientation of the antenna (see page 57).

Before performing the following operations, press

XM.

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

Note

CHANNEL INFO

e.g.) 043 XMU

Channel number/name

CATEGORY INFO

e.g.) ROCK

Channel category

SONG INFO

e.g.) Coldplay / Sp

Artist name / Song title

ANTENNA INFO

e.g.) 043 ANT:

Channel number/Antenna reception level

DSP PROG. INFO

e.g.) 7ch Enhancer

Sound field program

XMInformationANT:

ALLCHSEARCH

043:XMU

:Rock

:Coldplay

:Speedofsound

[1]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[3]

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ TUNING

62 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free music. Only

SIRIUS has more than 65 original music channels, from today’s hits to R&B, oldies, and classical masterpieces. From

authentic country and real bluegrass to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best of all, it's all 100%

commercial-free.

SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your

subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to 40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week. (Games

are broadcast during their respective seasons.)

Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS sports offering is unrivaled. And don't forget a host of other

great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For more

information, visit http://www.sirius.com/.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the

SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see

the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect

tuner.

• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed

at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The

orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs

depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals

supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the

antenna.You can mount it indoors or outdoors.

• Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or

“SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor (see

page 67) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the

orientation of the antenna.

• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall

outlet.

• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears in

the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect

tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the

connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna (see

page 115).

• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel display, this

unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

SIRIUS Satellite Radio

legal disclaimer

SIRIUS is available in the U.S.A. for subscribers with addresses in the continental U.S.A. and is available in Canada for subscribers

with a Canadian address. To Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold

separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and information.

“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

Connecting the SiriusConnect™

tuner

ANTENNA

SIRIUS

SiriusConnect™ tuner and the antenna

(sold separately)

To the AC wall outlet

Notes

63 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need

to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To

activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is

uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is

12-digit number and it appears on the package of the

SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect

tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel “0” (see below).

■ Displaying the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect tuner

1 Press

SIRIUS on the remote control.

2 Press

0 and then

ENT to display the

Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.

“000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx”

indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect

tuner) appears in the front panel display.

To scroll the message again, press

INFO (or

INFO).

Write the Sirius ID below.

3 Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate

your subscription.

Status messages appear in the front panel display or video

monitor during the activation. Once the activation is finished,

“SUB UPDATED” appears. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite

Radio” section on page 115.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press

SIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input

source.

The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights

up in the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio information (such as channel number, channel

name, category, artist name, or song title) for the

currently selected channel appears in the front panel

display.

When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

• The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you

can only select “184” or “000”.

• If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or in the OSD, see the “SIRIUS Satellite

Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 115 for

appropriate remedies.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the

SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on page 64.

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on page 64.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” on page 64.

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access

mode” on page 64.

• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL

888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” appears in the front panel

display. To scroll the message again, press

INFO (or

INFO).

• You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (see

page 65).

• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the

front panel display or in the video monitor (see page 67).

Activating SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ subscription

SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information

Contact for activation

URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

ID:

Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

operations

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to

SOURCE.

Notes

MULTI CH

VCR DVR

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

DVD CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER SIRIUS

184 SIRIUS Wea

Lights up

64 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH

(or

PRESET/CH

• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by

pressing

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h).

■ Category Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or

PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).

This unit skips the channels when this unit is All Channel Search

mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not

malfunction of this unit):

– the channel is locked (see page 65).

– the channel is out of service.

– you do not subscribe to the channel.

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see

“Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels” on

page 65.

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (

■ Direct number access mode

1 Press

SRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons (

) as shown below.

• To display the Sirius ID number displayed in the front panel

display, select channel “0”.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (

) on the remote control and then press

ENT to confirm the input number.

• Instead of pressing

ENT to tune into the channel

immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms

the entered channel number.

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a

one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms

the entered channel number.

• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears in the front

panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number

by using the numeric buttons (

) or press

ENT to cancel

(see page 65).

Before performing the following operations, press

SIRIUS

on the remote control.

Note

65 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

on page 64.

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio search modes.

See “Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations” on

page 63 for details.

2 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 30 seconds.

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 4 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select

a preset channel group and number (A1 to

E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing

A/B/C/D/E (or

A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.

4 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY) to set

the selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel

as a preset channel while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in

the same preset channel group and number is cleared.

You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access

to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit

automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is

in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode

and you search a channel by pressing

PRESET/

TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n).

■ Setting the code number and the locked

channels

Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number

(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.

1 Press

AMP on the remote control and then

press

MENU to display.

2 Press

n to select “MANUAL SETUP” and

then press

ENTER.

3 Press

n repeatedly to select “INPUT

MENU” and then press

ENTER.

Before performing the following operations, press

SIRIUS

on the remote control.

Setting the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ preset channels

Note

001 SIRIUS Hit

Currently selected channel number

MEMORY

Flashes

MEMORY

A1023 Hair Na

Currently selected preset channel group and

number

FlashesFlashes

Note

Setting the Parental Lock

A1:023 Hair Na

Colon (:)

66 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

4 Press

k / n repeatedly to select “SIRIUS”

and then press

ENTER.

The following menu screen appears.

5 Press

n repeatedly to select “PARENTAL

LOCK” and then press

ENTER.

“NEW PIN:0000” appears.

If a SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to this unit, “Not

Available” appears.

If the Parental Lock code number is already set, “PIN:___”

appears instead of “NEW PIN:0000”. Refer to step 8 and

then proceed the operations.

6 Enter the desired 4-digit code number by

using the numeric buttons (

Press

RETURN to return the previous menu level

without setting the code number.

7 Press

ENTER to confirm the code number.

“OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel

list appears. Refer to the step 9 and then proceed the

operations.

8 Enter the 4-digit code number you set at step

6 above to unlock the protection.

When the code number is correct, “OK” and then the

SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list appears.

9 Press

l / h repeatedly to select the

desired channel category and then press

k / n repeatedly to select the channel you

want to lock.

In the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen, this unit

outputs the sound of the selected channel even if the channel

is locked. Only the first eight characters of each channel

name are displayed in the list.

10 Press

ENTER to lock the selected

channel.

Check mark appears before the locked channel.

When you select the locked channel and press

ENTER,

this unit unlocks the selected channel.

11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 to lock the channels

you want.

12 Press

RETURN to exit from the

“PARENTAL LOCK” screen.

13 Press

MENU to exit from the setup menu.

This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in

the “PARENTAL LOCK” screen. If the channel is

locked, this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather

& Emergency” or “000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx”

(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect tuner).

• If you forget or want to change the Parental lock code number,

use “SR PIN” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to reset the Parental

Lock code number.

• When you select “ALL” in “INIT” (see page 109), all locked

channels are unlocked.

■ Tuning into the locked channels

You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct

number access mode or preset tuning mode. When you

tune into the locked channel, following message appears

in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set

for the Parental Lock feature by using the numeric buttons

(

) or press

ENT to cancel the tuning.

• If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong” appears in the

front panel display and this unit is tuned into the previously

selected channel.

• If a channel is unlocked, you can also select the channel in

Zone2.

Note

A) SIRIUS

. INPUTRENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB

PARENTAL LOCK

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

[

PARENTAL LOCK

NEWPIN:0000

[0] [9]:NUMBER

[ENT]:Enter

Note

Notes

PIN:

____

67 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information

(such as channel number, channel name, category, artist

name, composer name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display or in the OSD, see the “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” section

in “Troubleshooting” on page 115 for appropriate remedies.

■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press

INFO (or

INFO) repeatedly to toggle

between the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information display modes.

Back to “CHANNEL INFO”

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. You can set whether to display the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a

continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by

using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 96).

• If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character

that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

• To hold the current SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press

ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed.

Press

ENTER again to release the held information.

• When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the

signals, “ACQUIRING” appears in the front panel display.

• When an information is unavailable, “–– ––” appears.

■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information in the OSD

Press

DISPLAY on the remote control.

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

[1] Search mode (see page 63)

[2] Channel category

[3] Song title

[4] Composer name

[5] Antenna reception level

[6] Channel number/name

[7] Artist name

• To turn off the OSD, press

DISPLAY again.

• SIRIUS status messages also appear in the OSD.

• You can select the amount of time the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-

SOURCE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 96).

• To hold the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press

ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in

the OSD. While this unit is holding the information screen,

“HOLD” appears in the OSD.

• The HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel display while

you are holding the SIRIUS information. Press

ENTER

again or change the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel to release

the held information.

Before performing the following operations, press

SIRIUS

on the remote control.

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ information

Note

CHANNEL INFO

e.g.) 008 Big '80s

Channel number/name

CATEGORY INFO

e.g.) Pop

Channel category

SONG INFO

e.g.) Sanumemo / Roa

Artist name / Song title

COMPOSER INFO

e.g.) Frankie Zipper

Composer name

ANTENNA INFO

e.g.) 043 ANT:

Channel number/Antenna reception level

DSP PROG. INFO

e.g.) 7ch Enhancer

Sound field program

SIRIUSInformationANT:

ALLCHSEARCH

008:Big'80s

:Pop

:Sanumemo

:RoadtoIndia

C:FrankieZipper

[1]

[2]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[3]

[4]

USING IPOD™

68 En

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 25), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You

can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts

(such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 50).

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 116.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or

not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 94). The

DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode.

You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with

the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode).

■ Remote control operation ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote

mode

You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,

stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without

the aid of the OSD of this unit.

• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod

(some models only).

• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.

Using iPod™

Notes

Controlling iPod™

Before performing the following operations, press

V-AUX/DOCK on the remote control.

Button Function

8 ENTER Subsequent menu

k Menu up

n Menu down

l Previous menu

h Subsequent menu

0 ll Search backward (Press and hold)

Search forward

(Press and hold)

a Skip forward

b Skip backward

s Stop

e Pause (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

p Play (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

M MENU Previous menu

O DISPLAY Display

69 En

Using iPod™

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod

using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD

of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod

in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for

your iPod to suit your personal preferences.

• The name of the song being played also appears in the front

panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in

“OPTION MENU” (see page 96).

• You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play

information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-

SOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 96).

• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front

panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are

replaced with underscores “_”.

• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in

the OSD. Press

ENTER or

k/n repeatedly on the remote

control to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings.

• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your

iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy

watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

1 Press

DISPLAY on the remote control.

The following display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod

menu and then press

ENTER to begin

playback of the selected song.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums

(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),

Composers (composers), Settings (settings)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random

order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in

random order.

When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” appears

in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.

Repeat Repeat

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or “ ”

appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of

songs are being repeated.

■ The function of the play information

display

[1] Playback status

[2] Track number/total tracks

[3] Artist name

[4] Song title

[5] Progress bar

[6] Elapsed time

[7] Shuffle and repeat icons

[8] (playback), (pausing), (search

forward) and (search backward)

[9] Name of the album

[10] Remaining time

Notes

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Settings

iPod Top

1 All

iPod[Play]

1/9



FrankieZipper

Made-to-order

RoadtoIndia



||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;

0:51-7:44

All

[2]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1]

USING BLUETOOTH™ COMPONENTS

70 En

You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and

enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between

this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth adapter and your

Bluetooth component in advance.

Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth

component with the Bluetooth adapter connected to this

unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been

deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a

Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.

• You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you

use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter.

• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other

component with which Bluetooth communications are to be

established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s

operating instructions.

There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START

PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing.

■ Pairing by using “SET MENU”

Use this feature to perform pairing with the video monitor.

Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU”. See

page 95 for details.

■ Quick pairing

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press

V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the

input source.

2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want

to pair with.

3 Press and hold

BAND (or

BAND) for 3

seconds.

Once the Bluetooth adapter starts pairing,

“Searching...” appears for a moment. While the

Bluetooth adapter is in the pairing mode, DOCK

indicator flashes in the front panel display.

To cancel the pairing, press

BAND (or

BAND) again.

If the Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears in the front

panel display.

4 Check that the Bluetooth component detects

the Bluetooth adapter.

If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth

adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in

the Bluetooth device list.

5 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth

device list and then enter the pass key

“0000” on the Bluetooth component.

When the pairing procedure is successful,

“Completed” appears in the front panel display.

The Yamaha Bluetooth adapter can be paired with up to eight

Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully

with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the

pairing data for the least recently used other component is

cleared.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press

V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the

input source.

2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component.

When the connected Bluetooth adapter detects the

Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the

DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display.

• When you press

ENTER on the remote control, the

connected Bluetooth adapter searches and connect to the last

connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth adapter

cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in

the front panel display.

• To disconnect the Bluetooth adapter from the Bluetooth

component, press

RETURN.

Using Bluetooth™ components

Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter

and your Bluetooth™ component

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the

pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully

understand all the instructions before starting.

Note

Playback of the Bluetooth™

component

RECORDING

71 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating

instructions for those components.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.

• TONE CONTROL (see page 52) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 52) and the sound field programs (see page 48)

do not affect recorded material.

• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.

• The XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• A given input source is not output on the same AUDIO OUT (REC) channel.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing

video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an

S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.

• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

1 Turn on all the connected components.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (

)) to select

the source component you want to record

from.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Recording

Caution

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being

recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and

adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your

DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output

from the player.

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture

itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

72 En

You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory

settings. Although you do not have to change the initial

factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

You cannot change the sound field parameter values when

“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see

page 97). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,

set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press

AMP and then

PARAMETER on

the remote control.

The following screen is shown in the OSD.

3 Press

PROG l / h repeatedly to select

the desired sound field program you want to

adjust.

4 Press

k / n to select the desired sound

field parameter and then

l / h to change

the selected sound field parameter value.

•Press

h to increase the value.

•Press

l to decrease the value.

• For details about the function and control range of each sound

field parameter, see page 74.

• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the

initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the

sound field parameter name in the OSD.

• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field

program parameter settings.

• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field

programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.

In this case, press

k / n to scroll through pages.

• To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program,

press

n repeatedly to select “INITIALIZE” and then press

h. Once the confirmation screen appears in the OSD, press

h to confirm or

l to cancel the initialization.

5 Press

PARAMETER to turn off the sound

field parameter screen.

Advanced sound configurations

Changing sound field parameter

settings

Note

Sound field program category

Sound field parameters Sound field parameter

values

[p]/[[]:

MOVIE 1/2

Sci-Fi

SUR.;;PLIIx Movie

DSP LEVEL;;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;;16ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;;16ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0

Select

Cursor

[[]:

MOVIE 2/2

Sci-Fi

SB INIT.DLY;;15ms

SB ROOM SIZE ;;1.0

DIALOG LIFT;;;;;0

INITIALIZE

Initialize

73 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Basic configuration of sound field

programs

Each sound field program has some parameters defining

the characteristics of the program. To customize the

selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/

or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.

To change sound field parameter settings, see page 72 for details.

Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound

field programs (DSP LEVEL)

Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect

sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field

in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to

adjust the level of the effect sounds.

Adjust “DSP LEVEL” in the following cases:

Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL”

• The effect sound of the selected sound field

program is too weak.

• You cannot recognize any difference between the

sound field programs.

Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL”

• The sound is vague.

• You feel that the additional sound effect is

excessive.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

Adjusting the vertical dialogue position

(DIALG.LIFT)

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the

dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is

at the center of the video monitor screen.

If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video

monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT”.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the

highest position.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”

is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).

• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial

dialogue position.

The DSP effect

sound level is low.

The DSP effect sound

level is high.

Notes

The ideal

dialogue

position.

Move up to the ideal dialogue position.

74 En

Advanced sound configurations

■ Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations

Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail.

To change sound field parameter settings, see page 72 for details.

Sound field parameter Features

INIT.DLY

P.INIT.DLY

S.INIT.DLY

SB INI.DLY

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the

apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the

first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to

the reflection face.

When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the

corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the

CINEMA DSP programs.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)

1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time

Delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

75 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

ROOM SIZE

P.ROOM SIZE

S.ROOM SIZE

SB ROOM SIZE

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the

surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the

sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter

from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.

When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the

corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the

CINEMA DSP programs.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

LIVENESS

S.LIVENESS

SB LIVENESS

Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual

walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of

a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one

which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to

as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter

lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.

Control range: 0 to 10

Sound field parameter Features

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

76 En

Advanced sound configurations

REV.TIME

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation

sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment

over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening

room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

REV.DELAY

Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and

the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound

begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

REV.LEVEL

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the

stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

Reverberation

ReverberationSource sound

REV.TIME

Sound source

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

(dB)

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

Time

60 dB

(dB)

Source sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

77 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Selecting decoders used with sound

field programs (SUR.)

Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with

MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).

See page 49 for details about MOVIE sound field

program.

Available decoders

DIRECT

(“2ch Stereo” only)

2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi

stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only

when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).

• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry

when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2

channels and output from the front left and right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer

in the following cases:

– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 85).

– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 86) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”

(see page 85).

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

PL LEVEL

PR LEVEL

(“7ch Stereo” only)

7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence

right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The

available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers.

Control range: 0 to 100%

EFFECT LEVEL

(“Straight Enhancer” and

“7ch Enhancer” only)

Straight and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of

some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.

Choices: HIGH, LOW

• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.

• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.

Sound field parameter Features

Decoder Functions

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro

Logic II) processing for movie

sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder

is not available when “SUR.B L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 86).

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources.

78 En

Advanced sound configurations

■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel

sources (surround decode mode)

Use this feature to play back sources with selected

decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-

channels.

Press

AMP and then

SUR. DECODE

repeatedly on the remote control to select the

desired surround decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending on the

type of source you are playing and your personal

preference.

You can change the decoder parameter settings (see page 79).

Press

AMP and then

PARAMETER to display the decoder

parameters in the OSD. Press

k / n repeatedly to select the

desired decoder parameter and then press

l / h repeatedly to

change the value of the selected parameter.

■ Decoder descriptions (SUR.)

When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND

DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.

Selecting decoders

Decoder Descriptions

Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources.

The Pro Logic IIx

decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (

see page 86

PLIIx Music

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources.

The Pro Logic IIx

decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (

see page 86

PLIIx Game

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources.

The Pro Logic IIx decoder

is not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (

see page 86

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources.

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music sources.

Neural Sur.

(U.S.A. and Canada models

only)

Neural Surround processing for any sources.

The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals and analog 2-channel input sources.

When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is

selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any

additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM signals are played back in

stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM

Satellite Radio.

79 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Decoder parameter descriptions

Decoder parameter Features

PANORAMA

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as

well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

DIMENSION

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front

or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)

Initial setting: STD (standard)

CENTER WIDTH

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely

towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center

channel output towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to

7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)

Initial setting: 3

C. IMAGE

(“Neo:6 Music” only)

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center

channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.

Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to

1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)

Initial setting: 0.3

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

80 En

You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP

Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 32).

■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Menu Parameter Functions Page

A)SPEAKER SET

EXTRA SP ASSIGN

Selects the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP

speaker terminal.

LFE/BASS OUT

Selects the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the

low-frequency signals.

FRONT SP

Selects the size of the front speakers. 86

CENTER SP

Selects the size of the center speaker. 86

SUR. L/R SP

Selects the size and number of the surround speakers. 86

SUR.B L/R SP

Selects the size and number of the surround back speakers. 86

CROSS OVER

Selects the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or

“SMALL”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 86).

SUBWOOFER PHASE

Switches the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or

unclear.

B)SP LEVEL

FR.L/FR.R/CNTR/

SUR.L/SUR.R/

SBL/SBR/SWFR/

PR.L/PR.R

Adjust the balance the speaker levels between the front left or

surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET”

(see page 85).

C)SP DISTANCE

UNIT

Selects the unit to adjust the speaker distance. 88

FRONT L/FRONT R/

CENTER/SUR. L/

SUR. R/SBL/SBR/

SWFR/PRNS L/

PRNS R

Adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the

respective channel.

D)TEST TONE

— Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER SET”, “SP

LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings.

81 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Volume menu 2 VOLUME MENU

Sound menu 3 SOUND MENU

Parameter Functions Page

ADAPTIVE DRC

Selects whether this unit automatically adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the

volume level or not.

ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL

Selects whether this unit adjusts the DSP effect level automatically in conjunction with the

volume level or not.

MUTE TYPE

Adjusts how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 45). 89

MAX VOL.

Sets the maximum volume level of the main zone. 89

INIT. VOL.

Sets the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on. 89

Menu Parameter Functions Page

A)EQUALIZER

EQ TYPE SELECT

Selects the type of equalizer. 90

GEQ

Adjusts the tonal quality of the speakers when you set “EQ TYPE

SELECT” to “GEQ”.

TEST

Selects whether this unit outputs the test tone while making

adjustments of “GEQ” or not.

B)LFE LEVEL

SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level. 91

HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level. 91

C)DYNAMIC

RANGE

SPEAKER

Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the speakers. 91

HEADPHONE

Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the

headphones.

D)LIPSYNC

HDMI AUTO

Selects whether this unit activates the automatic audio and video

synchronization function (automatic lip sync) or not.

AUTO

Makes fine adjustments of the audio delay when the automatic audio

and video synchronization function is active.

MANUAL

Adjustment the audio delay manually when the connected video

monitor is not compatible with the automatic audio and video

synchronization function or “HDMI AUTO” is set to “OFF”.

E)EXTD SUR.

— Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel

sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES

decoders by using the connected surround back speakers.

82 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Input menu 4 INPUT MENU

Some parameters described below may not be available for all input sources and some parameters are only available for specific input

sources.

Option menu 5 OPTION MENU

Note

Parameter Functions Page

I/O ASSIGNMENT

Assigns the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of

this unit do not correspond to your needs.

INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. 94

VOL. TRIM

Adjusts the level of the signal input at each jack. 94

DECODER MODE

Switches the decoder activation mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for

DTS signals.

STANDBY CHARGE

Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the

standby mode (see page 29).

PARENTAL LOCK

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

Sets the SIRIUS Parental Lock code number and the channel lock configuration (see page 65) 94

START PAIRING

Pair the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a

Bluetooth component (see page 70).

BGV

Selects the video source played back in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks.

INPUT CH

Selects the number of channels input from an external decoder. 95

FRONT

Selects the analog jacks at which the front channel signals from an external decoder are input

when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”.

Menu Parameter Functions Page

A)DISPLAY SET

DIMMER

Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display. 96

OSD SHIFT

Adjusts the vertical position of the OSD. 96

OSD-SOURCE

Sets the amount of time to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information, XM Satellite Radio information, or iPod menu in the

video monitor after you perform a certain operation.

OSD-AMP

Sets the amount of time to display the status information screen after

you perform a certain operation.

FL SCROLL

Selects the mode to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information,

XM Satellite Radio information, or iPod menu in the front panel

display.

B)VIDEO SET

VIDEO CONV.

Selects whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO,

S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

C)MEMORY GUARD

— Prevents accidental changes to sound field program parameter values

and other system settings.

83 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO

Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 46).

D)INIT. CONFIG

AUDIO SELECT

Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input

sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the

power of this unit.

DECODER MODE

Designates the default decoder mode for the input sources connected

to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.

EXTD SUR.

Designates the extended decoder mode for the input sources connected

to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.

E)HDMI SET

S.AUDIO

Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on

another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

F)ZONE2 SET

MAX VOL.

Adjusts the maximum volume level in Zone 2. 99

INIT. VOL.

Sets the volume level of Zone 2 when you turn on the power of this

unit.

Menu Parameter Functions Page

84 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is

reproducing sound.

• If you press

PARAMETER during the “SET MENU”

operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled.

• Press

RETURN to return to the previous menu level.

1 Press

AMP and then

MENU to enter

“SET MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.

3 Press

ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.

The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the

OSD.

4 Press

k / n repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

menu.

The following displays are examples where “SOUND

MENU” is selected.

5 Press

k / n repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

submenu.

The following display is an example where “LFE

LEVEL” is selected.

6 Press

k / n to select the desired parameter

and then

l / h to change the parameter

settings.

•Press

h to increase the value.

•Press

l to decrease the value.

7 Press

MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

Using SET MENU

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;SIGNAL INFO

Up/Down

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

MANUAL SETUP

1 BASIC MENU

2 VOLUME MENU

3 SOUND MENU

4 INPUT MENU

5 OPTION MENU

Up/Down

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

3 SOUND MENU

A)EQUALIZER

B)LFE LEVEL

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

D)LIPSYNC

E)EXTD SUR.

Up/Down

Enter

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

B)LFE LEVEL

SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;-20dB

Up/Down

Adjust

85 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker

settings. Most of the “BASIC MENU” parameters are set

automatically when you run the automatic setup.

Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the

“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL” and “SP DISTANCE”.

■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET

To select the desired parameter, press

k / n repeatedly.

Extra speakers assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN

Selects the function of the speakers connected to the

EXTRA SP terminals.

• This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP

ASSIGN” parameter in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 33).

• If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 109), you cannot

select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.

• After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out

“AUTO SETUP” again (see page 32).

LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

LFE signals output

Low-frequency signals output

Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front

channels and other speakers set to “SMALL”.

Always output the low-frequency signals of the front

channels.

Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set

to “LARGE”.

Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to

“SMALL” or “NONE”.

1 BASIC MENU

Choice Descriptions

ZONE2

Select this setting when you use the Zone 2

speakers (see page 104).

FRONT B

Select this setting when you use another front

speaker system in the main zone (see page 43).

ZONE B

Select this setting when you use another front

speaker system in another room (see page 43).

PRESENCE

Select this setting when you use the presence

speakers (see page 13).

NONE

Select this setting when you do not use the

EXTRA SP terminals.

Notes

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

1 BASIC MENU

A)SPEAKER SET

B)SP LEVEL

C)SP DISTANCE

D)TEST TONE

Up/Down

Enter

XXXX[]/[]:Up/DownXXXXX

XXXX[p]/[[]:EnterXXXXXXX

[

A)SPEAKER SET

EXTRA SP ASSIGN

ZONE2 >FRONT B

ZONE B PRESENCE

NONE

ZONE2 SET

Not Available

Choice

Subwoofer(s) and speakers

Subwoofer(s)

Front

speakers

Other

speakers

BOTH

Output No output No output

SWFR

Output No output No output

FRONT

No output Output No output

Choice

Subwoofer(s) and speakers

Subwoofer(s)

Front

speakers

Other

speakers

BOTH

*1 *2 *3

SWFR

*4 *3 *3

FRONT

No output *1 *3

A)SPEAKER SET

LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR FRONT >BOTH

86 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Front speakers FRONT SP

When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, you can select only

“LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to

other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit change the value to

“LARGE” automatically.

Center speaker CENTER SP

When the center speaker is large:

Select “LARGE” (large).

When the center speaker is small:

Select “SMALL” (small).

When you do not use the center speaker:

Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are

directed to the front left and right speakers.

Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP

Surround back left/right speakers

SUR.B L/R SP

If the Dolby TrueHD audio signals are input and “SUR.B L/R

SP” is set to “NONE”, the left and right surround back channels

are not directed to the surround left and right speakers.

Measure for the speaker size

The woofer section of a speaker is

– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large

– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small

Choice Descriptions

LARGE

Select this setting when the front speakers are

large.

SMALL

Select this setting when the front speakers are

small.

Note

Choice Descriptions

LARGE

Select this setting when the center speaker is

large.

SMALL

Select this setting when the center speaker is

small.

NONE

Select this setting when you do not use the center

speaker. The center channel signals are directed

to the front left and right speakers.

A)SPEAKER SET

FRONT SP

SMALL >LARGE

A)SPEAKER SET

CENTER SP

NONE >SMALL LARGE

Choice Descriptions

LARGE

Select this setting when the surround speakers

are large.

SMALL

Select this setting when the surround speakers

are small.

NONE

Select this setting when you do not use the

surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode (see page 51), and “SUR.B

L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.

Choice Descriptions

LRGx1

Select this setting when the single surround back

speaker is large.

LRGx2

Select this setting when the surround back left

and right speakers are Large.

SMLx1

Select this setting when the single surround back

speaker is small.

SMLx2

Select this setting when the surround back left

and right speakers are small.

NONE

Select this setting when you do not use the

surround back speakers. The surround back

channel signals are directed to the surround left

and right speakers.

Note

A)SPEAKER SET

SUR. L/R SP

NONE >SMALL LARGE

A)SPEAKER SET

SUR.B L/R SP

SMLx1 >SMLx2 LRGx1

87 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Bass cross over CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) in “SPEAKER

SET” (see page 85). All frequencies below the selected

frequency will be sent to the subwoofer(s) or front

speakers depending on the setting of “LFE/BASS OUT”

in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 85).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover

frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and

set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL

Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 85).

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting:

FR.L/FR.R/SWFR/PR.L/PR.R: 0 dB

CNTR/SUR.L/SUR.R/SBL/SBR: –1.0 dB

• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the

crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or

slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

• Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the

“SPEAKER LEVEL” setting (see page 88).

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R

SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 86).

Choice Functions

NORMAL

(normal)

Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.

REVERSE

(reverse)

Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse.

A)SPEAKER SET

CROSS OVER

FREQ;;;;80Hz

A)SPEAKER SET

SUBWOOFER PHASE

>NORMAL REVERSE

SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker

FR.L

Front left speaker

FR.R

Front right speaker

CNTR

Center speaker

SUR.L

Surround left speaker

SUR.R

Surround right speaker

SBL

Surround back left speaker

SBR

Surround back right speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

PR.L

Presence left speaker

PR.R

Presence right speaker

Notes

B)SP LEVEL 1/2

FR.L

FR.R

CNTR

SUR.L

SUR.R

B)SP LEVEL 2/2

SBL

SBR

SWFR

88 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same

time.

Unit for the speaker distance adjustment UNIT

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)

[Other models]: meters (m)

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)

Initial setting:

FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/

PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)

SUR. L/SUR. R/SBL/SBR: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR.B

L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 86).

■ Test tone D)TEST TONE

Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER

SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings.

If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s

length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening

position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,

calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.

This function is automatically turned off if you exit from “BASIC

MENU”.

Choice Functions

meters (m)

Adjusts speaker distances in meters.

feet (ft)

Adjusts speaker distances in feet.

SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

SBL

Surround back left speaker

SBR

Surround back right speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

PRNS L

Presence left speaker

PRNS R

Presence right speaker

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

C)SP DISTANCE 2/2

SBL;;;;;;;;8.0ft

SBR;;;;;;;;8.0ft

SWFR;;;;;;;10.0ft

PRNS L;;;;;10.0ft

PRNS R;;;;;10.0ft

Up/Down

Adjust

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

C)SP DISTANCE 1/2

UNIT;;;;;;;;feet

FRONT L;;;10.0ft

FRONT R;;;10.0ft

CENTER;;;;;8.5ft

SUR. L;;;;;8.0ft

SUR. R;;;;;8.0ft

Up/Down

Select

Notes

Choice Functions

OFF

This unit does not output the test tone for the

“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP

DISTANCE” settings.

This unit outputs the test tone for the

“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP

DISTANCE” settings.

Note

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

D)TEST TONE

>OFF ON

Select

Return

89 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume

settings.

Adaptive dynamic range control

ADAPTIVE DRC

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in

conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful

when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When

“ADAPTIVE DRC” is set to “AUTO”, this unit controls

the dynamic range as follows:

– If the VOLUME setting is low:

the dynamic range is narrow

–If the VOLUME setting is high:

the dynamic range is wide

• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal

sources by using “DYNAMIC RANGE” in “SOUND MENU”

(see page 91).

• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.

The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function

when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode (see page 52).

Adaptive DSP level ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL

Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP

effect level (see page 73) automatically in conjunction

with the volume level.

Even if you set “ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL” to “AUTO”, this unit

does not change but the fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP

LEVEL” (see page 73).

Muting type MUTE TYPE

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (see page 45).

Maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected

loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume

range is –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “MAX

VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes

–80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.

Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level

is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX

VOL.” setting.

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume

setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and

“MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is

automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of

this unit next time.

• Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE SET” to set the initial volume

level in Zone 2.

Initial volume INIT. VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone

when the power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume

setting.

2 VOLUME MENU

Choice Functions

AUTO

Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

OFF

Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.

Note

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

2 VOLUME MENU

ADAPTIVE DRC;;;;OFF

ADAPTIVE DSP

LEVEL;;;;OFF

MUTE TYPE;;;;FULL

MAX VOL.;;;;+16.5dB

INIT. VOL.;;;;;;OFF

Up/Down

Select

Input level

Output level

Input level

AUTO

OFF

AUTO

OFF

VOLUME: low VOLUME: high

Choice Functions

AUTO

Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with

the volume level.

OFF

Does not adjust the DSP effect level

automatically.

Note

Choice Functions

FULL

Mutes all the audio output.

–20dB

Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.

Notes

Note

90 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Use this feature to adjust the audio parameters.

■ Equalizer A)EQUALIZER

Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the

graphic equalizer.

Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT

Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.

Currently applied parametric equalizer type (see page 33) appears

under “AUTO PEQ”.

You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO

SETUP” in advance (see page 32). In this case, “AUTO PEQ” is

automatically selected as the default setting.

Graphic equalizer GEQ

Use this feature to match the tonal quality of the center,

surround L/R and surround back L/R, and surround back

speakers with that of the front L/R speakers. You can

adjust 7 frequency bands (63 Hz, 160 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz,

2.5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 16 kHz).

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Press

k / n to select a frequency band and

l / h to adjust

the selected frequency band.

The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is

selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”.

Test tone TEST

Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while

listening to a test tone. To select “TEST”, press

k / n

repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen.

3 SOUND MENU

Choice Functions

AUTO PEQ

Uses the parametric equalizer adjusted in

“AUTO SETUP” (see page 33).

GEQ

Adjusts the built-in 7-frequency band graphic

equalizer so that the tonal quality of the speakers

matches. Press

ENTER to display the graphic

equalizer screen.

OFF

Deactivates the equalizing feature.

Note

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

3 SOUND MENU

A)EQUALIZER

B)LFE LEVEL

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

D)LIPSYNC

E)EXTD SUR.

Up/Down

Enter

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

A)EQUALIZER

EQ TYPE SELECT

AUTO PEQ >GEQ OFF

[NATURAL]

Select

Enter

Note

Choice Functions

OFF

Does not output test tones and output the

currently selected source component.

Outputs test tones from the selected speakers.

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

A)EQUALIZER 1/2

TEST >OFF ON

CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L

63Hz 0dB

160Hz 0dB

400Hz 0dB

1kHz 0dB

Up/Down

Select

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

A)EQUALIZER 2/2

TEST >OFF ON

CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L

2.5kHz 0dB

6.3kHz 0dB

16kHz 0dB

Up/Down

Adjust

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

A)EQUALIZER 1/2

TEST >OFF ON

CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L

63Hz 0dB

160Hz 0dB

400Hz 0dB

1kHz 0dB

Up/Down

Select

91 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Low-frequency effect level

B)LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input

signal contains the LFE channel.

Control range: –20 to 0 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Speakers SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level.

Headphones HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 85),

some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

jack.

■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is

decoding bitstream signals.

Speakers SPEAKER

Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.

Headphones HEADPHONE

Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the

headphones.

Note

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

B)LFE LEVEL

SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

Up/Down

Adjust

Choice Functions

MIN/AUTO

• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow

when this unit is decoding bitstream signals

(except Dolby TrueHD).

• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according

to the instruction of the input source signals

when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD

signals.

STD

Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When

this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the

dynamic range control is always active

regardless of the instruction of the input source

signals.

MAX

Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

SPEAKER;;;;;;;;;MAX

HEADPHONE;;;;;;;MAX

Up/Down

Select

92 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Audio and video synchronization

(lip sync)

D)LIPSYNC

Use this feature to adjust the audio and video

synchronization.

HDMI automatic lip sync mode HDMI AUTO

If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit and compatible with the automatic

audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip

sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video

synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate

or deactivate the automatic lip sync.

Choices: ON, OFF

If the connected video monitor is compatible

with the automatic lip sync:

Select “ON”. Use “AUTO” to make fine adjustments of

the audio and video synchronization.

If the video monitor is not compatible with the

automatic lip sync or you do not want to use

the automatic lip sync:

Select “OFF”. Use “MANUAL” to adjust the audio and

video synchronization.

Auto delay AUTO

Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and

video synchronization when you set “HDMI AUTO” to

“ON”.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

“offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio

delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio

delay that you set in “AUTO”. This unit stores the value of

“offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync

compatible video monitors.

Manual delay MANUAL

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output

manually to synchronize audio with video images when

you set “HDMI AUTO” to “OFF”.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

■ Extended surround E)EXTD SUR.

Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for

multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,

Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the

connected surround back speakers.

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

D)LIPSYNC

HDMI AUTO;;;;;;OFF

AUTO;;;;;;;;;---ms

(offset;;;---ms)

MANUAL;;;;;;;;;0ms

Up/Down

Select

Choice Functions

AUTO

Activates the optimum decoder to play back

signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit

recognizes a signal flag being input.

PLIIxMovie

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.

PLIIxMusic

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/

7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music

decoder.

EX/ES

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/

7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-

ES decoder.

OFF

Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1

channels.

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

E)EXTD SUR.

EXTD SUR.;;;;;;AUTO

Select

Return

93 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input

source.

Some parameters described above may not be available for all

input sources and some parameters are only available for specific

input sources.

Input/output assignment

I/O ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according

to the component to be used if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the

parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively

connect more components.

Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select

the corresponding component by using the

INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on

the remote control).

• “NONE” appears in the OSD when any input source is not

assigned to the input/output jack.

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the input/output jack

names that have been changed from their previous settings.

• The currently assigned input source for the selected input/

output jack appears in the OSD (“Current( DTV/CBL )” in the

display example above).

4 INPUT MENU

Input source Parameter

A)SIRIUS

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

PARENTAL LOCK

B)XM

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

C)TUNER INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

M)MULTI CH INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

BGV

INPUT CH

FRONT

D)CD

E)MD/CD-R

F)DVD

G)DTV/CBL

H)V-AUX

K)DVR

L)VCR

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

DECODER MODE

I)DOCK INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

STANDBY CHARGE

J)BLUETOOTH INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

START PAIRING

Note

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

4 INPUT MENU 1/2

A) SIRIUS

B) XM

C) TUNER

D) CD

E) MD/CD-R

F) DVD

G) DTV/CBL

Up/Down

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

4 INPUT MENU 2/2

H) V-AUX

I) DOCK

J) BLUETOOTH

K) DVR

L) VCR

M) MULTI CH

Up/Down

Enter

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

K) DVR

COMPONENT IN;;;[B]

COAXIAL IN;;;;NONE

OPTICAL IN;;;;NONE

HDMI IN;;;;;;;;[3]

Current( DTV/CBL )

Select

Enter

94 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Input rename INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input source

that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.

1 Press

l / h to place the “_” (underscore)

under the space or the character you want to

edit.

2 Press

k / n to select the character you

want to use and then press

l / h to move

to the next space.

• You can use up to 9 characters for each input.

•Press

n to change the character in the following order,

or press

k to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.

3 Repeat steps 1 through 2 to rename each

input source.

4 Press

ENTER to complete.

Volume trim VOL. TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at

each jack. This feature is useful if you want to balance the

level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in

volume when switching between input sources.

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

This parameter also affects the signals output at the audio ZONE

OUT jacks.

Decoder mode DECODER MODE

Use this feature to switch the decoder activation mode.

When you select “DTS” and digital audio signals are

input, this unit always activates the DTS decoder and only

plays back the DTS digital audio signals.

“DECODER MODE” is only available when the digital audio

input jacks (HDMI, OPTICAL, and/or COAXIAL) are assigned

to the selected input source.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock

PARENTAL LOCK

Use this feature to set the code number for locking the

desired SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Refer to “Setting

the Parental Lock” on page 65 for details.

Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE

Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the

battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the

standby mode.

Notes

[p]/[[]:

[ ]/[ ]:

[ENTER]:

[RETURN]:

[

K) DVR

INPUT RENAME

DVR . DVR

Position

Character

Enter

Return

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

C) TUNER

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;+6.0dB

Up/Down

Adjust

Choice Functions

AUTO

Automatically detects digital audio signal input

types and selects the appropriate decoder.

DTS

Activates the DTS decoder and plays back only

DTS digital audio signals when digital audio

signals are input.

Note

Choice Functions

AUTO

Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when

this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.

OFF

Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only

when this unit is turned on.

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

D) CD

I/O ASSIGNMENT

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB

DECODER MODE;;;AUTO

Up/Down

Select

95 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Start pairing START PAIRING

Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha

Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with

your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing,

refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your

Bluetooth™ component” on page 70.

1 Press

ENTER to start pairing.

The connected Bluetooth adapter starts searching

Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the

video monitor.

2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects

the Bluetooth adapter.

If the Bluetooth component the Bluetooth adapter,

“YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the

Bluetooth device list.

3 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth

device list and then enter the pass key

“0000” on the Bluetooth component.

Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,

“Pairing completed” appears.

To cancel the pairing, press

RETURN to exit from

“START PAIRING”.

4 Press

RETURN to exit from “START

PAIRING”.

• If the connected Bluetooth adapter cannot find any Bluetooth

components, “Not found” appears.

• If a Bluetooth adapter is not connected to this unit, “No

Bluetooth Adapter” appears.

Multi-channel input BGV BGV

Use this feature to select the video source played in the

background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks.

Input channels INPUT CH

Use this setting to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder (see page 25).

Choices: 6CH, 8CH

If the connected component outputs discrete

6-channel audio signals.

Select “6CH”.

If the connected component outputs discrete

8-channel audio signals.

Select “8CH”. Also set “FRONT” (see below) to the

analog audio jacks at which the front left and right

channel signals output from the connected component

are input.

Front left and right channels input jack FRONT

If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the

analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel

signals output from the connected external decoder is

input.

Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR,

V-AUX

“FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to

“8CH”.

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for

the pairing operation. You are recommended to read

and fully understand all the instructions before starting.

Notes

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

M) MULTI CH

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB

BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST

INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH

Up/Down

Select

Choice Functions

LAST

Automatically selects the last selected video

source as the background video source.

DVD, DTV/

CBL, DVR,

VCR, V-AUX

Selects the corresponding input source as the

background video source.

OFF

Does not play the video source in the

background.

Note

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

M) MULTI CH

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB

BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST

INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH

Up/Down

Select

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

M) MULTI CH

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB

BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST

INPUT CH;;;;;;;;8CH

FRONT;;;;;;;;;;;DVD

Up/Down

Select

96 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

Use “VIDEO” of “INIT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set “OSD

SHIFT” to the factory presets (see page 109).

Dimmer DIMMER

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: – 4 to 0

Control step: 1

• Press

l to make the front panel display dimmer.

• Press

h to make the front panel display brighter.

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Control range: –5 (downward) to +5 (upward)

Control step: 1

Initial setting: 0

• Press

l to lower the position of the OSD.

• Press

h to raise the position of the OSD.

Source feature OSD display time OSD-SOURCE

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

XM Satellite Radio information, SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information, or iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a

certain operation.

Amplifier function OSD display time OSD-AMP

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

status information screen after you perform a certain

operation.

Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL

Use this feature to set the mode to display the XM

Satellite Radio information, SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information, or iPod menu (such as song title or channel

name) in the front panel display.

5 OPTION MENU

Note

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

5 OPTION MENU

A)DISPLAY SET

B)VIDEO SET

C)MEMORY GUARD

D)INIT. CONFIG

E)HDMI SET

F)ZONE2 SET

Up/Down

Enter

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

A)DISPLAY SET

DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;;;0

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;+5

OSD-SOURCE;;;;;;30S

OSD-AMP;;;;;;;;;30S

FL SCROLL;;;;;;CONT

Up/Down

Adjust

Choice Functions

Displays the OSD unceasingly during an

operation.

10S

Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform

a certain operation.

30S

Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform

a certain operation.

Choice Functions

Displays the OSD unceasingly during an

operation.

10S

Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform

a certain operation.

30S

Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform

a certain operation.

Choice Functions

CONT

Continuous mode.

Select this to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

ONCE

Scroll-once mode.

Select this to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

97 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Video settings B)VIDEO SET

Use “VIDEO” of “INIT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the

parameters in “VIDEO SET” to the factory presets (see

page 109).

Video conversion VIDEO CONV.

Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals

input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks.

• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line

video signals interchangeably.

• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i

(PAL) of resolution are converted into the S-video or composite

video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the

same type of video connections between each component.

• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are

converted into component video signals, the picture quality may

suffer depending on your VCR.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video

jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such

cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.

■ Memory guard C)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound

field program parameter and other system settings.

• You can change the following parameters even if “MEMORY

GUARD” is set to “ON”:

– “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 92)

– “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” (see page 94)

– “PARENTAL LOCK” in “INPUT MENU” (see page 94)

– “MEMORY GUARD”

• When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, “ ” appears at the

top right of the “SET MENU” screen.

• You can change the settings of “SUR.” in the sound field

program parameter screen (see page 77) even if “MEMORY

GUARD” is set to “ON”.

Note

Choice Functions

Converts composite, S-video, and component

video signals interchangeably and up-converts

composite, S-video, and component video

signals to HDMI video signals.

OFF

Does not convert any signals.

Notes

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

B)VIDEO SET

VIDEO CONV.;;;;;;ON

Up/Down

Select

Choice Functions

OFF

Turns off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature.

Protects:

– sound field program parameters

– “AUTO SETUP” items

– all speaker levels

– “MANUAL SETUP” items

Notes

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

C)MEMORY GUARD

>OFF ON

Select

Return

98 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Initial configuration D)INIT. CONFIG

Use this feature to select the settings of the audio input

jack select, active decoders and extended surround when

you turn on this unit.

Audio select AUDIO SELECT

Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack

select setting (see page 44) for the input sources connected

to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power

of this unit.

Decoder mode DECODER MODE

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode

(see page 94) for the input sources connected to the

DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of

this unit.

Extended surround EXTD SUR.

Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode

(see page 92) for the input sources connected to the

DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of

this unit.

■ HDMI set E)HDMI SET

Use this feature to select the component to play back

HDMI audio signals.

Support audio S.AUDIO

Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI

audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component

connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this

unit.

• This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI

input jacks to the HDMI out jack only when this unit is turned

on even if “S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”.

• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the

connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of

each connected component.

Choice Functions

AUTO

Automatically detects the type of input signals

and selects the appropriate audio input jack

select setting.

LAST

Automatically selects the last input jack select

setting used for the connected input source.

Choice Functions

AUTO

Automatically detects the type of input signals

and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.

LAST

Automatically selects the last decoder mode

setting used for the connected input source.

Choice Functions

AUTO Automatically detects the digital audio input

signals and activates the appropriate decoder.

LAST Automatically selects the last decoder mode set

for “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU”.

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

D)INIT. CONFIG

AUDIO SELECT;;AUTO

DECODER MODE;;AUTO

EXTD SUR.;;;;;AUTO

Select

Return

Choice Functions

HTR-6160

Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The

HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input

jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on

the rear panel of this unit.

OTHER

Plays back HDMI audio signals on another

HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT

jack.

Notes

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

E)HDMI SET

S. AUDIO;;;;HTR-6160

Select

Return

99 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Zone 2 settings F)ZONE2 SET

Zone 2 Maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

Zone 2.

Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.”

setting. For example, when “INI.VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and

then “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is

automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of

this unit next time.

• The “MAX VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the

“ZONE 2 OUT” jacks.

Zone 2 Initial volume INI.VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 when the

power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.”

setting.

• When you select “FRONT B”, “PRNS”, “Zone B”, or “NONE”

in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 85), “Zone 2 SP Not

Assigned” appears in the OSD and the “ZONE2 SET”

parameter is not available.

• The “INI.VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the

“ZONE 2 OUT” jacks.

Notes

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

F)ZONE2 SET

MAX VOL.;;;+16.5dB

INIT. VOL.;;;;;OFF

Up/Down

Adjust

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

100 En

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code

for each input source (see page 102).

■ Controlling this unit

Press

AMP to control this unit.

AMP lights up for a few seconds after you press

AMP and any buttons (expect input selector buttons)

when the remote control is controlling this unit.

These buttons always control this unit.

These buttons control this unit only when

AMP is pressed.

A or B is the optional component control area button. You

can control the desired component without changing the input

source of this unit.

■ Controlling a TV

Press

DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your

TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for

DTV/CBL (see page 102).

These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether

you press

DTV/CBL or not.

These buttons control your TV only when

DTV/CBL is

pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on

page 101.

You can control more than one TV by setting the appropriate

remote control code for any input source selector buttons other

than

DTV/CBL. In such a case, you can control the buttons

highlighted above (*1 and *2) when you press the input source

selector button.

Remote control features

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

REC

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

INFO

PURE DIRECT

PARAMETER

MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

ENHANCER

l PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

MUTE

POWER

4321

ENT

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

VCR B

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

A XM SIRIUS

SRCH MODE

RETURN

MEMORY

AMP

Notes

Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV

TV POWER

Turns on or off the power.

TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume

level.

TV INPUT

Changes the input source.

TV MUTE

Mutes the audio output.

REC

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

ENHANCER

PROG

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

MUTE

POWER

4321

ENT

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

INFO

PURE DIRECT

PARAMETER

VCR B

XM SIRIUS

SRCH MODE

RETURN

MEMORY

DTV/CBL

101 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Controlling other components

Press one of the input selector buttons (4) buttons to

control other components. You must set the appropriate

remote control code for each input source in advance (see

page 102). The following table shows the function of each

control button used to control other components assigned

to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons

may not correctly operate the selected component.

• The remote control has 13 modes (control areas) to control

components so that the remote control can operate up to 13

different components.

• When you press one of the optional component control area

buttons (A and B), you can control the desired component

without changing the input source of this unit.

This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.

These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 102).

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

MUTE

POWER

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

VCR B

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

AVTV

SCENE

4321

AXMSIRIUS

REC

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT PARAMETER

MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

ENHANCER

l PROG h

4321

ENT

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

INFO

RETURN

MEMORY

[2]

[8]

[9]

[7]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]

[1]

Remote control

DVD player/

recorder

VCR

Digital TV/

Cable TV

LD player CD player

MD/CD

recorder

Tuner

[1] AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1

[2] TITLE Title Band

[3] PRESET/CH k

Up VCR channel up Up

Preset up (1-8)/

Tuning up

PRESET/CH n Down

VCR channel

down

Down

Preset down

(1-8)/Tuning

down

A-E/CAT. l Left Left

Preset down

(A-E)

A-E/CAT. h Right Right

Preset up

(A-E)

ENTER Enter Enter Hold

[4] RETURN Return Return Memory

[5] REC Disc skip

(player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec Rec *2 Disc skip Rec

p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play

backward

Search backward

Search backward Search backward Search backward Information

f Search forward Search forward

Search forward

Search forward Search forward Search forward

e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause

b Skip backward Skip backward

Skip backward

Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward

a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward

s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop

[6] 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons

Preset stations

(1-8)/Numeric

buttons

[7] MENU Menu Menu Search mode

[8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

[9] ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index Enter

Notes

102 En

Remote control features

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote

control codes” at the end of this manual.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a

Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case,

try setting another Yamaha remote control code.

1 While pressing and holding one of the input

selector buttons (

) on the remote control to

select the control area you want to set up,

press

AV POWER for more than 3

seconds.

AMP flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (

) to

enter the four-digit remote control code for

the component to be used.

When the setting succeeds,

AMP flashes twice;

however, when it does not,

AMP flashes

repeatedly.

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the

setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup

procedure.

■ Resetting all remote control codes

Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes

previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory

settings.

1 While pressing and holding

AMP on the

remote control, press

AV POWER for

more than 3 seconds.

AMP flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

code number “9981”.

When the setting succeeds,

AMP flashes twice;

however, when it does not,

AMP flashes

repeatedly.

If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 1, the

clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing

procedure.

Setting remote control codes

Input

source

Component

category

Manufacturer

Default

code

A TUNER Yamaha 5012

XM TUNER Yamaha 5009

SIRIUS TUNER Yamaha 5017

CD CD Yamaha 5013

MD/CD-R CD-R Yamaha 5001

TUNER TUNER Yamaha 5007

DVD DVD Yamaha 2000

DTV/CBL — — —

V-AUX TUNER Yamaha 5011

DVR DVR Yamaha 2011

B TUNER Yamaha 5009

Note

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

VCR B

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R

TUNER

XM SIRIUS

POWER

AMP

While holding down

Press for 3

seconds

flashes

Notes

POWER

AMP

Press for 3

seconds

While holding

down

AMP

flashes

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

103 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce

separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone

using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.

• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the

infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.

• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.

• Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to

use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.

■ Using the external amplifier

Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows.

To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

Using multi-zone configuration

Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be

connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connecting Zone 2

Note

OUTOUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

This unit

Yamaha

component

Yamaha

component

Infrared signal

receiver

Infrared signal emitter

DVD player (etc.)

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal receiver

Second zone

(Zone 2)

Main zone

This unit

From the ZONE 2 OUT jacks

From the REMOTE OUT jack

From the REMOTE IN jack

104 En

Using multi-zone configuration

■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit

Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals and then set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to

“ZONE2” (see page 85).

• You can use the speakers connected EXTRA SP speaker terminals as the front speaker system of another zone. Set “EXTRA SP

ASSIGN” to “ZONE B” (see page 85).

• When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone 2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume level and

maximum volume level of the Zone 2 speakers (see page 99).

You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control

buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The

available operations are as follows:

• Selecting the input source of Zone 2.

• Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as

the input source of Zone 2 (see page 53).

• Tuning into XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected

as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 57) (U.S.A. and

Canada models only).

• Tuning into SIRIUS Satellite Radio when “SIRIUS” is

selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 62)

(U.S.A. and Canada models only).

• Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a

Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this

unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source

(see page 68).

You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is

flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is

automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal

operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection

procedure.

■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel

Turning on Zone 2

Press

ZONE CONTROL to turn on Zone 2.

Activating the Zone 2 operation mode

Press

ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2.

The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for

approximately 10 seconds.

Important safety notice

The EXTRA SP speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or

more than one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low

impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This

information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.

Controlling Zone 2

FRONT B/ZONE2/

PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

Second zone

(Zone 2)

This unit

Main zone

Note

ZONE2

Flashes

105 En

Using multi-zone configuration

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Operating Zone 2

Press

INPUT l / h to select the desired input

source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in

the front panel display.

• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER

features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER

operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 53.

• Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM

Satellite Radio features in Zone 2. For details about the

XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM Satellite

Radio tuning” on page 57.

• Select “SIRIUS” as the input source to use the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio features in Zone 2. For details about the

SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations, see “SIRIUS

Satellite Radio™ tuning” on page 62.

• Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod

features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod

operations, see “Using iPod™” on page 68.

• Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use Bluetooth

component features in Zone 2. For details about the

Bluetooth component operations, see “Using

Bluetooth™ components” on page 70.

Set Zone 2 to the standby mode

Press

ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the

standby mode.

Press

SYSTEM OFF to set the main zone and Zone 2 to the

standby mode simultaneously.

■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote

control

Turning on Zone 2

While pressing and holding

AMP, press

POWER.

Operating Zone 2

While pressing and holding

AMP, press one of

the input selector buttons (

) to select the

desired input source of Zone 2.

MUTE and

VOLUME +/– are available to control Zone2

with same procedure as mentioned above.

Setting Zone 2 to the standby mode

While pressing and holding

AMP, press

STANDBY to set ZONE 2 to the standby

mode.

Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2

operation mode.

Notes

POWER

AMP

While holding

down

ADVANCED SETUP

106 En

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional

operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each

parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

• The settings you make are reflected next time you press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn on this unit (see page 29).

•Only

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF,

SYSTEM OFF,

TONE CONTROL and the

PROGRAM selector are effective while you

are using the advanced setup menu.

• No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.

1 Press

SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to

set this unit to the standby mode.

2 Press and hold

TONE CONTROL and

then press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn

on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

the parameter you want to adjust.

The name of the selected parameter appears in the

front panel display.

4 Press

TONE CONTROL repeatedly to

change the selected parameter setting.

5 Press

SYSTEM OFF to save the new

setting and set this unit to the standby mode.

The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on

this unit.

■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.

Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit

so that it matches that of your speakers.

Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6ΩMIN

• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω.

• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω.

The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems

(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”.

Advanced setup

Notes

Using the advanced setup

TONE CONTROL

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

While holding

down

SPIMP.-8MIN

Currently selected

parameter setting

Currently selected

parameter

SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level

8ΩMIN

Front

If you use one set (A or B),

the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

If you use two sets (A and

B), the impedance of each

speaker must be 16 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

6ΩMIN

Front

If you use one set (A or B),

the impedance of each

speaker must be 4 Ω or

higher.

If you use two sets (A and

B), the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 6 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

107 En

Advanced setup

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP

Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote

control recognition. This feature is useful when you

operate this unit and the other Yamaha receivers/

amplifiers in the same room separately.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID code is

set to “5019”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID code is

set to “5020”.

Setting remote control AMP ID codes

You need to set the remote control AMP ID code for the

remote control.

1 While pressing and holding

AMP on the

remote control, press

AV POWER for

more than 3 seconds.

AMP flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

code number “5019” or “5020”.

When the setting succeeds,

AMP flashes twice;

however, when it does not,

AMP flashes

repeatedly.

The remote control setting

The setting of this unit

■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TU

Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for

remote control recognition.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID code

is set to “5007”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID code

is set to “5016”.

Setting remote control TUNER ID codes

You need to set the remote control TUNER ID library

code for the remote control.

1 While pressing and holding

TUNER on the

remote control, press

AV POWER for

more than 3 seconds.

AMP flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

code number “5007” or “5016”.

When the setting succeeds,

AMP flashes twice;

however, when it does not,

AMP flashes

repeatedly.

The remote control setting

The setting of this unit

See page 106 for the operation of the advanced setup.

AMP ID

code *1

Function

Remote

control AMP

ID *2

5019

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

5020

To operate this unit using

an alternative code.

ID2

POWER

AMP

Press for 3

seconds

While holding

down

AMP

flashes

TUNER ID

code *1

Function

Remote

control

TUNER ID *2

5007

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

5016

To operate this unit using

an alternative code.

ID2

POWER

TUNER

Press for 3

seconds

While holding

down

AMP

flashes

108 En

Advanced setup

■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote

control recognition.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID code is

set to “5009”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID code is

set to “5015”.

Setting remote control XM ID codes

You need to set the remote control XM ID code for the

remote control.

1 While pressing and holding

XM on the

remote control, press

AV POWER for

more than 3 seconds.

AMP flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

code number “5009” or “5015”.

When the setting succeeds,

AMP flashes twice;

however, when it does not,

AMP flashes

repeatedly.

The remote control setting

The setting of this unit

■ Remote control SIRIUS ID REMOTE SR

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use this feature to set the SIRIUS ID of this unit for

remote control recognition.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control SIRIUS ID code

is set to “5017”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control SIRIUS ID code

is set to “5018”.

Setting remote control SIRIUS ID codes

You need to set the remote control SIRIUS ID code for the

remote control.

1 While pressing and holding

SIRIUS on the

remote control, press

AV POWER for

more than 3 seconds.

AMP flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

code number “5017” or “5018”.

When the setting succeeds,

AMP flashes twice;

however, when it does not,

AMP flashes

repeatedly.

The remote control setting

The setting of this unit

See page 106 for the operation of the advanced setup.

XM ID code

Function

Remote

control XM

ID *2

5009

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

5015

To operate this unit using

an alternative code.

ID2

POWER

Press for 3

seconds

While holding

down

AMP

flashes

SIRIUS ID

code *1

Function

Remote

control

SIRIUS ID *2

5017

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

5018

To operate this unit using

an alternative code.

ID2

POWER

SIRIUS

Press for 3

seconds

While holding

down

AMP

flashes

109 En

Advanced setup

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock

personal identification number reset

SR PIN

Use this feature to set the code number (personal

identification number) for the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Parental Lock feature to the initial factory setting. This

feature is useful when you forget or want to change the

current code number.

Choices: RESET, CANCEL

• Select “RESET” to set the code number to the initial

factory setting.

• Select “CANCEL” to set the code number to the initial

factory setting.

Even if you set “SR PIN” to “RESET”, this unit does not unlock

the locked channels. The initial factory setting of the Parental

Lock code number is “0000”.

■ Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier

function (see page 16).

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier

function. “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE”

automatically, and this unit outputs the front channel

audio signals at the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

speaker terminals.

• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier

function.

When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, you can only select “FRONT B”

or “NONE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 85).

■ SCENE IR code setting SCENE IR

Use this feature to output the remote control signals at the

REMOTE OUT jack automatically when this unit is in the

SCENE mode.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” when the component connected to the

REMOTE OUT jack is the Yamaha component and has

the capability of the SCENE control signals. This unit

automatically sends the remote control signals to the

component.

• Select “OFF” when the component connected to the

REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha component and

does not have the capability of the SCENE control

signals.

If noises are output when you operate the SCENE function, set

“SCENE IR” to “OFF”.

■ Parameter initialization INIT

Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the

initial factory settings. You can select the category of

parameters to be initialized.

Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL

• Select “DSP PARAM” to initialize all the parameters

of the sound field programs (see page 72).

• Select “VIDEO” to initialize the parameters in

“VIDEO SET” (see page 97) and “OSD SHIFT” in

“DISPLAY SET” (see page 96).

• Select “ALL” to initialize all the parameters of this

unit.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization

procedure.

• The advanced setup menu parameters are not initialized.

• Use “INITIALIZE” in the sound field program menu to

initialize the parameters of the desired program (see page 72).

See page 106 for the operation of the advanced setup.

Note

Notes

TROUBLESHOOTING

110 En

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly. —

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 28

The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this

unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wires

for each connection do not touch anything other than

their respective connections.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning or

strong static electricity).

Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power

cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use this

unit normally.

—

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

20-26

The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. 36

Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,

“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.

Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 44

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG” while playing a source

encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS.

Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or

“COAX/OPT”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector

buttons on the remote control).

42, 43

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 14

The front speakers to be used have not been

selected properly.

Select the front speakers by pressing

SPEAKERS

on the front panel repeatedly.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. —

The sound is muted.

Press

MUTE or

VOLUME +/– on the remote

control to resume audio output and then adjust the

volume.

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component, such

as a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this

unit.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

“S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and

“HDMI” audio signals are not being played

back on this unit.

Set “S.AUDIO” to “HTR-6160” in “MANUAL

SETUP”.

No picture. The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video jacks.

Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source

components in the same way as you connect your

video monitor to this unit.

Non-standard video signals are input.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 28, 106

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned this unit off. Turn this unit on, and play the source again. —

The sound is muted.

Press

MUTE or

VOLUME +/– on the remote

control to resume audio output.

Sound is heard from

the speaker on one

side only.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. 87

111 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

sound field program, the source signal is

directed to the center channel, and the front

and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound is heard

from the center

speaker.

“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “CENTER SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”. 86

One of the sound field programs (except

for “7ch Stereo”) has been selected.

Try another sound field program. 48

No sound is heard

from the presence

speakers.

The sound field programs are turned off.

Press

STRAIGHT to turn them on.

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program. 42

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting

other than “PRESENCE”.

Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”. 85

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 86

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and

a monaural source is being played back.

Press

STRAIGHT on the front panel so that

“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display.

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE” and “SUR.B L/R SP” is

automatically set to “NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting

other than “NONE”.

“SUR.B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 86

Zone 2 speaker

settings are not

available in “SET

MENU”.

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting

other than “ZONE2”.

Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE2”. 85

FRONT B speakers

cannot be activated.

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting

other than “FRONT B”.

Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”. 85

No sound from the

center, surround or

surround back

speakers when the

FRONT B speakers are

activated.

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to

“ZONE B”.

Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”. 85

Presence speaker

settings are not

available in “SET

MENU”.

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting

other than “PRESENCE”.

Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”. 85

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set

to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 85

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set

to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a

2-channel source is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 85

The source does not contain low-frequency

signals.

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator in the

front panel display

does not light up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operating

instructions for your component.

—

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG”.

Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 44

A humming sound is

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power of the component. —

The sound effects

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effects

with a recording component.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

112 En

Troubleshooting

■ HDMI

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.

The source component is not connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

21, 23

Some components cannot record Dolby

Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an analog

component connected

to the AUDIO OUT

(REC) jacks.

The source component is not connected to

the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite

Radio signals are not output at the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings of this

unit cannot be

changed.

“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is

set to “ON”.

Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 97

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

No sound is heard

from the connected

HDMI component.

The HDMI component does not accept the

multi-channel audio signals.

Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the

2-channel audio signals at the source component such

as a DVD player.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 14

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment. —

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature is too high and the

overheat protection circuitry has been

activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No picture or sound.

The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI

components.

—

HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support

the HDCP copy protection standards.

—

113 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Tuner (FM/AM)

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections. 27

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method. 53

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot be

obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-

path interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. —

Use the manual tuning method. 53

Previously preset

stations can no longer be

tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again. 54

The desired station

cannot be tuned into with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and

orient the antenna for the best reception.

—

Use the manual tuning method. 53

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noise can result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

—

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —

114 En

Troubleshooting

■ XM Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

CHECK XM TUNER

The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the

XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM Mini-

Tuner dock is not connected to this unit.

Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock

and check the XM Mini-Tuner dock cable is connected

to this unit.

57, 61

CHECK ANTENNA

The XM antenna is not connected to the

XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM antenna

cable has become damaged.

Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to

the XM Mini-Tuner Dock and check the antenna cable

for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the cable is

damaged.

The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or

program information from the XM satellite

signal. This message can also occur in

weak XM signal conditions. Note that this

unit may not respond to some operations

while this message is displayed.

This message should disappear in a few seconds in

good signal conditions. If you see this message often,

reposition the XM antenna to get better signal

reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in

the front panel or “XM Information” screen in the

video monitor to check the antenna reception level.

NO SIGNAL

The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the

XM satellite signal. Something may be

blocking the XM antenna’s view of the

satellites or the antenna is not properly

aimed.

Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM

antenna to get better signal reception. Use the

“ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or

“XM Information” screen in the video monitor to

check the antenna reception level. See instructions

supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for

antenna installation information.

OFF AIR

The XM channel you selected is not

currently broadcasting.

Check back at a later time; in the mean time, select

another channel.

—

CH UNAUTH

You may be attempting to tune to an XM

channel that is blocked or that you cannot

receive with your XM subscription

package.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and

http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the

current list of channels. For information on receiving

this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ (US

residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian

residents) or contact XM Satellite Radio at

1-800-967-2346 (US residents) and 1-877-438-9677

(Canadian residents).

CH UNAVAIL

The selected channel is not available. The

channel may have been reassigned to a

different channel number. This message

may occur initially with a new XM Mini-

Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not

received XM’s signal for an extended

period.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and

http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the

current list of channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-

Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received

XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM

Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at

least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again.

—

- - - -

No artist name or song title is available for

this selection.

No action required. —

115 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

■ Remote control

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

ANTENNA ERROR

The antenna is not connected to the

SiriusConnect tuner properly.

Check the connection of the antenna and

SiriusConnect tuner.

CHECK SR TUNER

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected

to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly.

Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and

this unit.

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected

to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to

the AC wall outlet.

NOT SUPPORTED

This unit does not support the connected

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit

supports,

ACQUIRING

The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the

SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”

information in the front panel display or “SIRIUS

Information” screen in the video monitor to check the

antenna reception level.

62, 67

UPDATING

The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

channel list.

Wait until the updating is complete. —

The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the

subscription.

F/W UPDATING

The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

firmware.

Wait until the updating is complete. —

CALL SIRIUS

(CALL 888-539-

SIRIUS TO

SUBSCRIBE)

The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the

selected channel.

URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

Select another channel. 63

SUB UPDATED

The subscription information is updated.

INVALID

The selected channel is currently out of

service.

Select another channel. 63

Not Available

The operation you made is not available.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

The remote control code is not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using “List of

remote control codes” at the end of this manual.

102

Try setting another code for the same manufacturer

using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

102

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

116 En

Troubleshooting

■ iPod

In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod

(see page 25).

■ Bluetooth

Note

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit is in the middle of recognizing the

connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring song

lists from your iPod.

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod. —

Unknown iPod

The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod

mini are supported.

—

iPod connected

Your iPod is properly stationed in a

Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-

10, sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit, and the

connection between your iPod and this unit

is complete.

Disconnected

Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha

iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Unable to play

This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are

playable.

—

Store some other playable music files on your iPod. —

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Searching...

The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth

component is in the middle of the pairing.

The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth

component is in the middle of establishing

the connection.

Completed

The paring is completed.

Canceled

The paring is canceled.

BT connected

The connection between the Yamaha

Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold

separately) and the Bluetooth component is

established.

Disconnected

The Bluetooth component is disconnected

from the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such

as YBA-10, sold separately).

No BT adapter

The Bluetooth adapter is not connected to

the DOCK terminal.

Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-

10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal.

BT Error

This unit detects a problem of the

connected Bluetooth adapter.

Set this unit to the standby mode and then turn on

again.

—

117 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ AUTO SETUP

Before AUTO SETUP

During AUTO SETUP

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Connect MIC!

Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

Unplug HP!

Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. —

Memory Guard!

The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 97

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

E-1:NO FRONT SP

Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 14

E-2:NO SUR SP

A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 14

E-3:NO PRNS SP

A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 14

E-4:SBR->SBL

Only a right surround back channel signal is

detected.

Connect the surround back speaker to the

LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS

terminal if you only have one surround back

speaker.

E-5:NOISY

Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet

environment.

—

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners or move them away from the

optimizer microphone.

—

E-6:CHECK SUR.

Surround back speakers are connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

Connect surround speakers when you use

surround back speakers.

E-7:NO MIC

The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

E-8:NO SIGNAL

The optimizer microphone does not detect

test tones.

Check the microphone setting. 32

Check the speaker connections and

placement.

E-9:USER CANCEL

The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was

cancelled due to user activity.

Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 32

E-10:INTERNAL ERROR

An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 32

118 En

Troubleshooting

After AUTO SETUP

• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.

• If a warning message “W-1”, “W-2” or “W-3” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.

• If an error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.

Warning message Cause Remedy

See

page

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Speaker polarity is not correct. This message

may appear depending on the speakers even

when the speakers are connected correctly.

Check the speaker connections for proper

polarity (+ or –).

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)

The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker closer to the listening

position.

—

W-3:LEVEL ERROR

The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive.

Readjust the speaker installation so that all

speakers are set in locations with similar

conditions.

—

Check the speaker connections. 14

Use speakers of similar quality. —

When “SWFR: TOO LOUD”or “SWFR:

TOO LOW” appears in the result screen, the

output volume of the subwoofer.

W-4:CHECK PRNS

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to

“PRESENCE”, though the presence channel

signals are not detected.

Check the presence speaker connections. 14

Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to a setting other

than “PRESENCE”.

Notes

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

119 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.

• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup

menu parameters will not be initialized.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.

To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press

SYSTEM OFF on the front panel.

1 Press

SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to

set this unit to the standby mode.

2 Press and hold

TONE CONTROL and

then press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn

on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

“INIT”.

4 Press

TONE CONTROL repeatedly to

select “ALL”.

Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure

without making any changes.

5 Press

SYSTEM OFF to confirm your

selection and set this unit to the standby

mode.

Resetting the system

Notes

TONE CONTROL

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

While holding

down

GLOSSARY

120 En

■ Audio and video synchronization

(lip sync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical

term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining

audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and

transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires

complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an

automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices

to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately

without user interaction.

■ Bi-amplification connection

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.

One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker

while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter

section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a

restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each

amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely

to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the

speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass

filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a

cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency.

Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is

separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P

B and PR

signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more

faithfully with this system because each of these signals is

independent. The component signal is also called the “color

difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted

from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is

required in order to output component signals.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal is

composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color,

brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a

video component transmits these three elements combined.

■ Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays,

up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI

specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other

displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and

eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions

and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio

can represent many times more shades of gray between black and

white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors

within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you

completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front

channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels,

Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an

additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low

Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is

counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the

surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum

volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise

sound orientation generated using digital sound processing

provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-

channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from

5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that

derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording.

For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie

sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with

“fly-over” and “fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed

for high-definition programming and media including HD

broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory

audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for

Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with

discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps,

Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels

simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for

the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,

Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby

Digital.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast

numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new

technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left

and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right

channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro

Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and

“Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-

channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There

are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,

“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only)

and “Game mode” for game sources.

Glossary

121 En

Glossary

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to

reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and

right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural),

and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The

surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency

range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The

Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital

signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume

on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and

directionality.

■ Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD

DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard

for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,

this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the

studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up

to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc

players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD

also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel

audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby

Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range

control.

■ DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on

digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD,

signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency

sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and

oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence

with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high

sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that

offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for

multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-

compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz

sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24”

refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality

transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel

sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and

motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.

■ DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and

is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the

world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you

can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front

left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1

(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit

incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel

reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing

5.1-channel format.

■ DTS Express

DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional

feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality,

low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet

applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio

feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD.

These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the

additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on

demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are

mixed down with the main audio stream on the player

component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to

the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or

analog connections.

■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio

technology developed for high-definition disc-based media

including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional

audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this

technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from

the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps

for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up

to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc

players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing

multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■ DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD

DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard

for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers

sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a

high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to

18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,

DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of

24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version

1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/

amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains

fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

■ HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video

interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a

set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a

digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-

definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a

single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and

supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video

interface that meets the security requirements of content

providers and system operators. For further information on

HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

122 En

Glossary

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency

range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is

counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range

compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels

in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel

playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the

full-range channels with higher separation just like digital

discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

■ Neural Surround

Neural Surround

™

represents the latest advancement in surround

technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for

digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in

surround sound. Neural Surround

™

employs psychoacoustic

frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more

detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and

localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from

5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio

signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any

compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and

DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the

size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for

“Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses

and then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the

signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency,

while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into

a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range

of rates that can be played back is determined based on the

sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound

level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In

principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range

of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number

of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y

signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance

through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates

video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback

of even more beautiful images.

■ x.v.Color

A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a

more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression

of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining

compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color”

expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural

images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer

graphics.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION

123 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Elements of a sound field

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable

us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

There are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field in addition to the

direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s

instrument.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberations taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any

size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is

exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field

processor.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for

acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original sound

field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby

Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual

experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your

own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound field so that

accurate representations of all the sound field programs

can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm

that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects

even without any surround speakers by using virtual

surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual

CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that

does not include a center speaker.

■ Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit

enhances your listening experience by regenerating the

missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,

flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency

fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-

frequency bass is compensated, providing improved

performance of the overall sound system.

Sound field program information

SPECIFICATIONS

124 En

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 110 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

Front L/R, 8/6/4/2 Ω ..................................... 135/165/195/240 W

• Maximum Output Power [Russia model]

Speaker impedance setting: 8 Ω, 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω

.......................................................................................... 145 W

• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]

8 Ω ....................................................................................... 1.4 dB

• IEC Output Power [Russia model]

Front L/R, 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ................................... 105 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

Front L/R, SPEAKERS A, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω

.................................................................................. 120 or more

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

CD, etc.

Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD ............................... 2.3 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT ................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, FRONT SP: SMALL)

................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE 2 OUT ....................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R, 10 Hz to 100 kHz

...................................................................................... +0/–3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

CD, etc. to Front L/R

2ch Stereo, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω ............... 0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD, etc. (Effect Off, 250 mV) to Front L/R

............................................................................ 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R

................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control ....................................... MUTE/– 80 dB to 16.5 dB

• Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F.

(FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP, SUR.B L/R SP:

SMALL/SML) ............................................................ 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Format (Gray Back)

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................... NTSC

[Russia model] ........................................................................ PAL

• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio

.................................................................................... 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Component (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Russia model] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

1 kHz, 100% MOD., Mono .............................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ......................................................................... 0.5%

• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Russia model] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

Specifications

125 En

Specifications

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Russia model] ................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 400 W/500 VA

[Russia model] .................................................................... 440 W

• Standby Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.8 W or less

[Russia model] .......................................................... 0.1 W or less

• AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

.......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[Russia model] ...................................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 171 x 393 mm

(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 15-1/2 in)

• Weight .............................................................. 11.8 kg (26 lbs 4 oz)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

INDEX

126 En

■ Numerics

1 BASIC MENU, Manual setup .......... 80

2 VOLUME MENU, Manual setup ..... 81

2ch STEREO, Sound field program .... 50

3 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 81

4 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 82

5 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 82

7ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 50

7ch STEREO, Sound field program .... 50

96/24 indicator ..................................... 30

■ A

A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 96

A)EQUALIZER, Sound menu ............. 90

A)SPEAKER SET, Basic menu ........... 85

AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) ............. 28

ACQUIRING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio

status message ............................... 115

Action Game, Sound field program ..... 49

ADAPTIVE DRC indicator ................. 30

ADAPTIVE DRC, Volume menu ....... 89

ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL,

Volume menu .................................. 89

Adaptive DSP level, Volume menu ..... 89

Adaptive dynamic range control,

Volume menu .................................. 89

Advanced setup .................................. 106

Advanced sound configurations ........... 72

Adventure, Sound field program ......... 50

ALL CH SEARCH, SIRIUS tuning .... 64

ALL CH SEARCH, XM tuning ........... 59

All Channel Search mode,

SIRIUS tuning ................................. 64

All Channel Search mode,

XM tuning ....................................... 59

AM antenna connection ....................... 27

AM tuning ............................................ 53

Amplifier function OSD display time,

Display settings ............................... 96

ANTENNA ERROR, SIRIUS Satellite

Radio status message ..................... 115

Audio and video synchronization,

Sound menu ..................................... 92

Audio cable plugs ................................ 17

Audio components connection ............. 23

Audio information ................................ 46

Audio input jacks selection .................. 44

AUDIO jacks ....................................... 17

Audio jacks .......................................... 17

AUDIO SELECT ................................. 44

AUDIO SELECT,

Initial configuration ......................... 98

Audio select, Initial configuration ....... 98

Audio signal flow ................................. 19

Auto delay, Lip sync ............................ 92

AUTO SETUP ............................... 32, 80

Auto setup ............................................ 80

AUTO SETUP, Troubleshooting ....... 117

AUTO TUNING .................................. 53

AUTO, Lip sync .................................. 92

Automatic tuning mode,

FM/AM tuning .................................53

Available decoders with Sound field

programs ..........................................77

■ B

B)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu ...............91

B)SP LEVEL, Basic menu ...................87

B)VIDEO SET, Option menu ..............97

BASIC MENU, Manual setup .............85

Basic menu, Manual setup ...................80

Bass cross over, Speaker settings .........87

BGV, Input menu .................................95

BGV, Input menu, Multi-channel input

BGV, Input menu .............................95

BI-AMP, Advanced setup ..................109

Bi-Amplifier, Advanced setup ...........109

Bluetooth adapter connection ...............25

Bluetooth component playback ............70

Bluetooth component use .....................70

Bluetooth, Troubleshooting ...............116

BT connected,

Bluetooth status message ...............116

BT Error,

Bluetooth status message ...............116

■ C

C)DYNAMIC RANGE,

Sound menu .....................................91

C)MEMORY GUARD,

Option menu ....................................97

C)SP DISTANCE, Basic menu ............88

C. IMAGE, Decoder parameter ...........79

Cable plugs ...........................................17

CALL SIRIUS, SIRIUS Satellite Radio

status message ................................115

CAT SEARCH, SIRIUS tuning ...........64

CAT SEARCH, XM tuning .................59

Category Search mode,

SIRIUS tuning ..................................64

CD player connection ...........................23

Cellar Club,

Sound field program ........................49

CENTER PRE OUT jack

connection ........................................24

CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............86

Center speaker level, Sound field

parameter .........................................77

Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........86

CENTER WIDTH,

Decoder parameter ...........................79

CH UNAVAIL, XM Satellite Radio

status message ................................114

Chamber, Sound field program ............48

Charge on standby, Input menu ...........94

CHECK ANTENNA, XM Satellite Radio

status message ................................114

CHECK PRNS, Automatic setup

warning message ............................118

CHECK SR TUNER, SIRIUS Satellite

Radio status message ..................... 115

CHECK SUR., Automatic setup

error message ................................ 117

CHECK XM TUNER, XM Satellite Radio

status message ............................... 114

CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 31

CLASSICAL,

Sound field category ....................... 48

Completed,

Bluetooth status message .............. 116

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ............. 17

Compressed Music Enhancer .............. 50

Connect error,

iPod status message ....................... 116

Connect MIC!,

Automatic setup error message ..... 117

Connection,

AM antenna connection .................. 27

Connection, audio components ........... 23

Connection, Bluetooth adapter ............ 25

Connection, CD player ........................ 23

Connection,

CENTER PRE OUT jack ................ 24

Connection, DVD player ..................... 21

Connection, DVD recorder .................. 22

Connection, External amplifier ........... 24

Connection, external decoder .............. 25

Connection, FM antenna ..................... 27

Connection,

FRONT PRE OUT jacks ................. 24

Connection, iPod universal dock ......... 25

Connection, Multi-format player ......... 25

Connection, Power cable ..................... 28

Connection, projector .......................... 20

Connection, PVR ................................. 22

Connection, set-top boxes ................... 22

Connection, SiriusConnect tuner ......... 62

Connection, speaker cable ................... 16

Connection, SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

jack .................................................. 24

Connection,

SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks .......... 24

Connection,

SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ........ 24

Connection, TV monitor ...................... 20

Connection, VCR ................................ 22

Connection, XM Mini-Tuner Dock ..... 57

Controlling a TV ............................... 100

Controlling other components,

Remote control .............................. 101

Controlling this unit,

Remote control .............................. 100

CROSS OVER, Speaker settings ........ 87

CT LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 77

Current status display .......................... 44

■ D

D)INIT. CONFIG, Option menu ......... 98

D)LIPSYNC, Sound menu .................. 92

Index

127 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

D)TEST TONE, Basic menu ............... 88

Decoder descriptions ............................ 78

Decoder indicators ............................... 30

DECODER MODE,

Initial configuration ......................... 98

Decoder mode,

Initial configuration ......................... 98

DECODER MODE,

Input menu ....................................... 94

Decoder mode, Input menu .................. 94

Decoder selection ................................. 78

DEVICE OVER,

HDMI error message ....................... 46

DIALG.LIFT,

Sound field parameter ...................... 73

Dialogue lift,

Sound field parameter ...................... 73

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ................. 17

DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks .................. 17

DIMENSION, Decoder parameter ....... 79

DIMMER, Display settings ................. 96

Dimmer, Display settings .................... 96

Direct number access mode,

SIRIUS tuning ................................. 64

Direct number access mode,

XM tuning ........................................ 59

DIRECT, Sound field parameter ......... 77

Disconnected,

Bluetooth status message ............... 116

Disconnected, iPod status message .... 116

Display settings, Option menu ............. 96

DIST, Auto setup result ....................... 34

DOCK indicator ................................... 30

Drama, Sound field program ............... 50

DSP effect sound level,

Sound field parameter ...................... 73

DSP indicators ..................................... 31

DSP LEVEL,

Sound field parameter ...................... 73

DVD player connection ....................... 21

DVD recorder connection .................... 22

Dynamic range, Sound menu ............... 91

■ E

E)EXTD SUR., Sound menu ............... 92

E)HDMI SET, Option menu ................ 98

E-1:NO FRONT SP,

Automatic setup error message ...... 117

E-10:INTERNAL ERROR,

Automatic setup error message ...... 117

E-2:NO SUR SP, Automatic setup

error message ................................. 117

E-3:NO PRNS SP, Automatic setup

error message ................................. 117

E-4:SBR->SBL, Automatic setup

error message ................................. 117

E-5:NOISY, Automatic setup error

message .......................................... 117

E-6:CHECK SUR., Automatic setup error

message .......................................... 117

E-7:NO MIC, Automatic setup error

message .......................................... 117

E-8:NO SIGNAL, Automatic setup error

message .......................................... 117

E-9:USER CANCEL,

Automatic setup error message ......117

EFFECT LEVEL,

Sound field parameter ..........................77

ENHANCER indicator .........................30

ENTERTAINMENT,

Sound field category ........................49

EQ TYPE SELECT, Equalizer ............90

EQ, Auto setup parameter ....................33

Equalizer type select, Equalizer ...........90

Equalizer, Sound menu ........................90

EXTD SUR., Initial configuration .......98

Extended surround,

Initial configuration .........................98

Extended surround, Sound menu .........92

External amplifier connection ..............24

External decoder connection ................25

EXTRA SP ASSIGN, Auto setup

parameter ..........................................33

EXTRA SP ASSIGN,

Speaker settings ...............................85

Extra speaker assignment,

Auto setup parameter .......................33

Extra speaker assignment,

Speaker settings ...............................85

■ F

F)ZONE2 SET, Option menu ..............99

F/W UPDATING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio

status message ................................115

FL SCROLL, Display settings .............96

FM antenna ...........................................27

FM antenna connection ........................27

FM tuning .............................................53

Front input, Input menu ........................95

Front panel display ...............................30

Front panel display scroll,

Display settings ................................96

FRONT PRE OUT jack connection .....24

FRONT SP, Speaker settings ...............86

Front speaker set selection ...................43

Front speakers, Speaker settings ..........86

FRONT, Input menu ............................95

■ G

GEQ, Equalizer ....................................90

Graphic equalizer, Equalizer ................90

■ H

Hall in Munich,

Sound field program ........................48

Hall in Vienna,

Sound field program ........................48

HDCP ERROR,

HDMI error message ........................46

HDMI ...................................................18

HDMI AUTO, Lip sync .......................92

HDMI auto, Lip sync ...........................92

HDMI indicator ....................................30

HDMI set, Option menu .......................98

HDMI, troubleshooting ......................112

HEADPHONE, Dynamic range ...........91

HEADPHONE,

Low frequency effect level ..............91

Headphones ......................................... 45

Headphones indicator .......................... 30

Headphones, Dynamic range ............... 91

Headphones,

Low frequency effect level .............. 91

■ I

I/O ASSIGNMENT, Input menu ......... 93

Infrared window .................................. 31

INI.VOL., Audio settings .................... 89

INI.VOL., Zone 2 settings ................... 99

INIT, Advanced setup ....................... 109

INIT.DLY,

Sound field parameter ..................... 74

Initial configuration,

Option menu .................................... 98

Initial delay,

Sound field parameter ..................... 74

Initial volume, Audio settings ............. 89

INPUT CH, Input menu ...................... 95

Input channel and speaker

indicators ......................................... 31

Input channel indicators ...................... 31

Input channels, Input menu ................. 95

INPUT MENU, Manual setup ............. 93

Input menu, Manual setup ................... 82

INPUT RENAME, Input menu ........... 94

Input rename, Input menu .................... 94

Input signal indicators ......................... 30

Input source indicators ........................ 30

Input source information display ......... 46

Input/output assignment,

Input menu ....................................... 93

INTERNAL ERROR,

Automatic setup error message ..... 117

INVALID, SIRIUS Satellite Radio

status message ............................... 115

iPod universal dock connection ........... 25

iPod use ............................................... 68

iPod, Troubleshooting ....................... 116

■ J

Jacks .................................................... 17

■ L

LEVEL ERROR, Automatic setup

warning message ........................... 118

LFE/BASS OUT,

Speaker settings ............................... 85

LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ........... 85

Lip Sync, Sound menu ........................ 92

LIVE/CLUB,

Sound field category ........................ 49

LIVENESS,

Sound field parameter ..................... 75

Liveness, Sound field parameter ......... 75

LOADING, XM Satellite Radio status

message ......................................... 114

Loading..., iPod status message ......... 116

Low-frequency effect level,

Sound menu ..................................... 91

LVL, Auto setup result ........................ 34

Index

128 En

■ M

Manual delay, Lip sync ........................ 92

MANUAL SETUP ............................... 80

Manual setup ........................................ 80

MANUAL TUNING ............................ 53

Manual tuning mode,

FM/AM tuning ................................. 53

MANUAL, Lip sync ............................ 92

MAX VOL., Audio settings ................. 89

MAX VOL., Zone 2 settings ............... 99

Maximum volume ................................ 89

Maximum volume, Audio settings ....... 89

Memory Guard!, Automatic setup error

message .......................................... 117

Memory guard, Option menu ............... 97

Mono Movie, Sound field program ..... 50

MOVIE, Sound field category ............. 49

MULTI CH INPUT component

selection ........................................... 43

MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................... 25

Multi-channel source playback with

headphones ...................................... 51

Multi-format player connection ........... 25

Multi-information display .................... 31

MULTI-ZONE Configuration ........... 103

MUSIC ENHANCER,

Sound field category ........................ 50

Music Video, Sound field program ...... 49

MUTE .................................................. 45

MUTE indicator ................................... 30

Muting .................................................. 45

■ N

Neo:6 Cinema, Decoder type ......... 77, 78

Neo:6 Music, Decoder type ................. 78

Neural Sur., Decoder type .................... 78

No BT Adapter,

Bluetooth status message ............... 116

NO FRONT SP, Automatic setup

error message ................................. 117

NO MIC, Automatic setup

error message ................................. 117

NO PRNS SP, Automatic setup error

message .......................................... 117

NO SIGNAL, Automatic setup error

message .......................................... 117

NO SIGNAL, XM Satellite Radio status

message .......................................... 114

NO SUR SP, Automatic setup error

message .......................................... 117

NOISY, Automatic setup

error message ................................. 117

NOT SUPPORTED, SIRIUS Satellite

Radio status message ..................... 115

Number of speakers,

Auto setup result .............................. 34

■ O

OFF AIR, XM Satellite Radio status

message .......................................... 114

OPTIMIZER MIC jack ........................ 32

OPTION MENU, Manual setup .......... 96

Option menu, Manual setup ................. 82

OSD SHIFT, Display settings .............. 96

OSD shift, Display settings ..................96

OSD-AMP, Display settings ................96

OSD-SOURCE, Display settings .........96

Other components controlling by remote

control ............................................101

Other components controlling, Remote

control ............................................101

OUT OF PHASE, Automatic setup

warning message ............................118

Out of Res., HDMI message ................46

OVER 24m (80ft), Automatic setup

warning message ............................118

■ P

P.INIT.DLY,

Sound field parameter ......................74

P.ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ......................75

Pairing, Bluetooth operation ................70

PANORAMA, Decoder parameter ......79

Parameter initialization,

Advanced setup ..............................109

Parametric equalizer type, Auto setup

parameter .........................................33

Parental Lock .......................................65

PARENTAL LOCK,

Input menu .......................................66

PHONES jack ......................................45

PL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......77

Playing video sources

in the background .............................45

PLII Game, Decoder type ....................78

PLII Movie, Decoder type .............77, 78

PLII Music, Decoder type ....................78

PLIIx Game, Decoder type ..................78

PLIIx Movie, Decoder type ...........77, 78

PLIIx Music, Decoder type ..................78

Power cable connection .......................28

PR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......77

Presence left speaker level,

Sound field parameter ......................77

Presence right speaker level,

Sound field parameter ......................77

Presence sound field initial delay,

Sound field parameter ......................74

Presence sound field room size,

Sound field parameter ......................75

Presence speaker indicators .................31

Presence speaker using .........................13

Preset channel setting,

XM tuning ..................................60, 65

Preset SCENE templates ......................39

Preset Search mode,

SIRIUS tuning ..................................64

Preset Search mode, XM tuning ..........59

PRESET SEARCH,

SIRIUS tuning ..................................64

PRESET SEARCH, XM tuning ...........59

PRESET TUNING ...............................53

Preset tuning mode,

FM/AM tuning .................................53

Pro Logic, Decoder type ......................78

Projector connection ............................20

Pure Direct ........................................... 52

Pure hi-fi sound ................................... 52

PVR connection ................................... 22

■ R

Rear panel ............................................ 10

REMOTE AMP, Advanced setup ..... 107

Remote control AMP ID,

Advanced setup ............................. 107

Remote control codes ........................... iii

Remote control codes setting ............ 102

Remote control SIRIUS ID, Advanced

setup .............................................. 108

Remote control TUNER ID, Advanced

setup .............................................. 107

Remote control XM ID,

Advanced setup ............................. 108

Remote control,

Troubleshooting ............................ 115

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ..................... 26

REMOTE SR, Advanced setup ......... 108

REMOTE TU, Advanced setup ......... 107

REMOTE XM, Advanced setup ....... 108

Rename, SCENE template .................. 40

Repeat .................................................. 69

Repeat, iPod playback ......................... 69

Resetting the system .......................... 119

REV.DELAY,

Sound field parameter ..................... 76

REV.LEVEL,

Sound field parameter ..................... 76

REV.TIME,

Sound field parameter ..................... 76

Reverberation delay, Sound field

parameter ......................................... 76

Reverberation level, Sound field

parameter ......................................... 76

Reverberation time,

Sound field parameter ..................... 76

Roleplaying Game,

Sound field program ........................ 49

ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ..................... 75

Room size, Sound field parameter ...... 75

■ S

S VIDEO jacks .................................... 17

S.AUDIO, HDMI set ........................... 98

S.INIT.DLY,

Sound field parameter ..................... 74

S.LIVENESS,

Sound field parameter ..................... 75

S.ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ..................... 75

SB INI.DLY,

Sound field parameter ..................... 74

SB LEVEL,

Sound field parameter ..................... 77

SB LIVENESS,

Sound field parameter ..................... 75

SB ROOM SIZE,

Sound field parameter ..................... 75

SBR->SBL, Automatic setup error

message ......................................... 117

Index

129 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

SCENE 1 ................................................ 8

SCENE 2 ................................................ 8

SCENE 3 ................................................ 8

SCENE 4 ................................................ 8

SCENE IR code setting,

Advanced setup .............................. 109

SCENE IR, Advanced setup .............. 109

SCENE template rename ..................... 40

Sci-Fi, Sound field program ................. 49

Searching...,

Bluetooth status message ............... 116

Selection, Audio input jacks ................ 44

Selection, Front speaker set ................. 43

Selection, MULTI CH INPUT

component ....................................... 43

Selection, SCENE template ................. 37

SET MENU usage ............................... 84

Setting SCENE template input source,

Remote control ................................ 41

Set-top box connection ........................ 22

Shuffle, iPod playback ......................... 69

SIGNAL INFO .................................... 46

Signal information ............................... 83

SILENT CINEMA ............................... 51

SILENT CINEMA indicator ................ 31

Sirius ID ............................................... 63

SIRIUS Parental Lock personal

identification number reset,

Advanced setup .............................. 109

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ........................ 62

SIRIUS Satellite Radio activation ....... 63

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock,

Input menu ....................................... 66

SIRIUS Satellite Radio,

Troubleshooting ............................. 115

SiriusConnect tuner connection ........... 62

SL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ...... 77

SLEEP indicator .................................. 31

Sleep timer ........................................... 47

Sound field indicators .......................... 30

Sound field parameter changing .......... 72

Sound field programs ........................... 48

Sound field programs

with headphones .............................. 51

Sound field programs

without surround speakers ............... 51

SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........... 90

Sound menu, Manual setup .................. 81

Source feature OSD display time,

Display settings ................................ 96

SP A B indicators ................................. 31

SP IMP., Advanced setup .................. 106

SP, Auto setup result ............................ 34

Speaker cable connection ..................... 16

Speaker distance, Auto setup result ..... 34

Speaker distance, Basic menu .............. 88

Speaker distances ................................. 88

Speaker impedance setting ................... 28

Speaker impedance,

Advanced setup .............................. 106

Speaker level adjustment ..................... 52

Speaker level, Auto setup result .......... 34

Speaker level, Basic menu ................... 87

Speaker settings, Basic menu ............... 85

SPEAKER, Dynamic range .................91

SPEAKER,

Low frequency effect level ..............91

Speakers, Dynamic range .....................91

Speakers,

Low frequency effect level ..............91

Specifications .....................................124

Spectacle, Sound field program ...........49

Sports, Sound field program ................49

SR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......77

SR PIN, Advanced setup ....................109

Standard, Sound field program ............49

STANDBY CHARGE, Input menu .....94

Standby mode, Main zone ....................29

Standby mode, Zone 2 ........................105

START PAIRING, Input menu ............95

STEREO, Sound field category ...........50

Straight .................................................51

Straight Enhancer,

Sound field program ........................50

Straight mode .......................................51

SUB UPDATED, SIRIUS Satellite Radio

status message ................................115

SUBWOOFER PHASE,

Speaker settings ...............................87

Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ......87

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

connection ........................................24

Supplied accessories ...............................2

Support audio, HDMI set .....................98

SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ............86

SUR.B L/R SP, Speaker settings ..........86

SUR.BACK PRE OUT jack

connection ........................................24

Surround back left/right speakers,

Speaker settings ...............................86

Surround back sound field initial delay,

Sound field parameter ......................74

Surround back sound field liveness,

Sound field parameter ......................75

Surround back sound field room size,

Sound field parameter ......................75

Surround back speaker level,

Sound field parameter ......................77

Surround decode mode .........................78

Surround left speaker level,

Sound field parameter ......................77

Surround left/right speakers,

Speaker settings ...............................86

SURROUND PRE OUT jack

connection ........................................24

Surround right speaker level,

Sound field parameter ......................77

Surround sound field initial delay, Sound

field parameter .................................74

Surround sound field liveness,

Sound field parameter ......................75

Surround sound field room size,

Sound field parameter ......................75

SYSTEM OFF ......................................29

■ T

Test tone, Basic menu ..........................88

Test tone, Equalizer ..............................90

TEST, Equalizer .................................. 90

The Bottom Line,

Sound field program ........................ 49

The Roxy Theatre,

Sound field program ........................ 49

Tonal quality adjustment ..................... 52

Troubleshooting ................................. 110

Tuner indicators ................................... 30

Tuner, Troubleshooting ..................... 113

Turning off ........................................... 29

Turning on ........................................... 29

TV monitor connection ........................ 20

■ U

Unable to play,

iPod status message ....................... 116

UNIT, Speaker distance ....................... 88

Unit, Speaker distance ......................... 88

Unknown iPod,

iPod status message ....................... 116

Unplug HP!, Automatic setup error

message ......................................... 117

Unprocessed input sources .................. 51

UPDATING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio

status message ............................... 115

USER CANCEL, Automatic setup error

message ......................................... 117

■ V

VCR connection .................................. 22

VIDEO AUX jacks .............................. 26

VIDEO CONV., Video settings .......... 97

Video conversion, Video settings ........ 97

Video information ............................... 46

VIDEO jacks ....................................... 17

Video jacks .......................................... 17

Video signal flow ................................ 19

Video sources in the background ........ 45

Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................... 51

VIRTUAL indicator ............................ 31

VOL. TRIM, Input menu ..................... 94

VOLUME level indicator .................... 30

Volume menu, Manual setup ............... 81

Volume Trim, Input menu ................... 94

■ W

W-1:OUT OF PHASE, Automatic setup

warning message ........................... 118

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft), Automatic setup

warning message ........................... 118

W-3:LEVEL ERROR, Automatic setup

warning message ........................... 118

W-4:CHECK PRNS, Automatic setup

warning message ........................... 118

■ X

XM Mini-Tuner Dock ......................... 57

XM Mini-Tuner Dock connection ....... 57

XM Satellite Radio .............................. 57

XM satellite radio activation ............... 58

XM Satellite Radio display ................. 61

XM satellite radio tuning ..................... 57

XM Satellite Radio,

Troubleshooting ............................ 114

Index

130 En

■ Y

YPAO indicator ................................... 30

■ Z

Zone 2 ................................................ 103

Zone 2 Initial volume,

Zone 2 settings ................................. 99

Zone 2 Maximum volume,

Zone 2 settings ................................. 99

Zone 2 settings, Option menu .............. 99

Zone B .................................................. 43

ZONE2 indicator .................................. 31

“

SPEAKERS” or “

DVD”

(example) indicates the name of

the parts on the front panel or the

remote control. Refer to the

attached sheet or the pages at the

end of this manual for the

information about each position of

the parts.

■ Front panel

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

TONE CONTROLSYSTEM OFF STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT

SCENE

AUDIO SELECT

EFFECT

PROGRAM INPUT

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

PRESET/TUNING/CHBANDSPEAKERS MEMORY

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

1234

OPTIMIZER MIC

AUDIO OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

VIDEOS VIDEO

VOLU ME

INFO

AB CD E F G H I J

KL M NO PQ R S

APPENDIX

■ Remote control

REC

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

PARAMETER

MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

ENHANCER

l PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

MUTE

POWER

4321

ENT

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

VCR B

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

MEMORY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

AXMSIRIUS

INFO

iii

List of remote control codes

Blu-ray player

Samsung 2137

CD player

Yamaha 5000, 5013

CD Recorder

Yamaha 5001

DVD

Acoustic Solutions

2078

Aiwa 2055, 2100

Akai 2096

Akura 2076

Alba 2078, 2086

Apex 2027, 2049

Awa 2078

Axion 2078

Brainwave 2096

Brandt 2073, 2085

Broksonic 2060

Bush 2075, 2078, 2112

Centrex 2077

Classic 2078

Clatronic 2075

Coby 2078

C-Tech 2074

CyberHome 2025, 2079, 2091

Daewoo 2092, 2098

Dansai 2096

Daytek 2080, 2089

DEC 2075

Denon 2030, 2102, 2103

Denver 2075, 2076

Diamond 2074

DK Digital 2094

Dual 2078

D-Vision 2096

DVX 2074

Elta 2096

Euroline 2096

Funai 2052, 2058

Global Solutions2074

Global Sphere 2074

Goodmans 2075, 2077, 2078

Grundig 2077, 2098

H&B 2075

Haaz 2074

HE 2078

Hitachi 2032, 2072

Home Electronics

2078

Innovation 2072

Irradio 2134

JDB 2078

JVC 2033, 2045, 2053,

2073, 2099

Kenwood 2030, 2097

Kingavon 2075

Koda 2075

Lawson 2074

Lenco 2075

LG 2084, 2087

Lifetec 2072

Limit 2074

LogicLab 2074

Luxor 2077

Magnavox 2037, 2073, 2075

Magnum 2072

MBO 2078

Medion 2072

Micromaxx 2072

Micromedia 2073

Microstar 2072

Mitsubishi 2035

Mizuda 2075

Mustek 2078

Naiko 2077

Onkyo 2073, 2135

Orava 2075

P&B 2075

Pacific 2074

Panasonic 2030, 2040, 2054,

2057, 2105, 2110

Philips 2019, 2026, 2046,

2073, 2081, 2090

Pioneer 2036, 2082

Proline 2077

Provision 2075

RCA 2031, 2042, 2050,

2051

Red Star 2076

Reoc 2074

Roadstar 2075, 2078, 2086

Rowa 2077

Saba 2085

Sabaki 2074

Samsung 2032, 2041, 2104,

2113

Sansui 2074

Sanyo 2095

ScanMagic 2078

Scientific Labs 2074

Scott 2088

SEG 2074, 2086

Sharp 2034, 2043, 2059,

2093, 2106

Silva 2076

Singer 2074

Skymaster 2074, 2078

Skyworth 2076

SM Electronic 2074, 2078

Sony 2028, 2029, 2039,

2083, 2107

Soundmaster 2074

Soundmax 2074

Standard 2074

Star Cluster 2074

Starmedia 2075

Supervision 2074, 2078

Sylvania 2052, 2058

Synn 2074

TCM 2072

Teac 2074

Tec 2076

Technics 2030

Technika 2096

Technosonic 2096

Tevion 2072, 2074

Thomson 2085, 2109

Tokai 2076

Toshiba 2026, 2044, 2048,

2056, 2073, 2108,

2111

United 2078

Voxson 2078

Wharfedale 2074

Xlogic 2074

Yakumo 2077

Yamada 2077

Yamaha 2000, 2001, 2003,

2030, 2101

Yukai 2078

Zenith 2038, 2047, 2073

DVD Recorder

Apex 2024

JVC 2070

LG 2071

Panasonic 2020, 2065, 2066,

2067

Philips 2019, 2061, 2062,

2063

Pioneer 2021

RCA 2018

Sony 2022, 2064

Toshiba 2068

Yamaha 2023

Yukai 2069

DVD/LD

Pioneer 2036

DVD/VCR

JVC 1017, 2045

LG 1071, 2087

Panasonic 1020, 1072, 2040,

2105

Philips 1025

RCA 1022, 2042

Samsung 1021, 2041, 2104

Sharp 1023, 1073, 2043,

2106

Sony 1019, 1074, 2039,

2107

Toshiba 1024, 1075, 2044,

2108

Zenith 1026, 2047

DVD-DVR

Panasonic 2067

Pioneer 2114

Samsung 2115

Toshiba 2068

DVR

ABS 2132

Alienware 2132

CyberPower 2132

Dell 2132

DIRECTV 2123, 2128, 2129,

2133

DISH Network 2126, 2127

Dishpro 2126

Echostar 2126, 2127

Expressvu 2126

Gateway 2132

GOI 2126

Hewlett Packard 2132

Hitachi 2008

Howard Computers

2132

HTS 2126

Hughes 2123, 2128

Humax 2123

Hush 2132

iBUYPOWER 2132

JVC 2126, 2127

Linksys 2132

Media Center PC

2132

Microsoft 2132

Mind 2132

Niveus Media 2132

Northgate 2132

Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017,

2120

Philips 2117, 2121, 2123,

2128

Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014

Proscan 2129

RCA 2116, 2124, 2129,

2133

ReplayTV 2118, 2119, 2120

Sharp 2009, 2010

Sonic Blue 2119, 2120

Sony 2005, 2006, 2007,

2122, 2130, 2131,

2132

Stack 10 2132

Stack 9 2132

Systemax 2132

Tagar Systems 2132

Tivo 2116, 2121, 2122,

2123, 2130, 2131

Toshiba 2004, 2125, 2132

Touch 2132

UltimateTV 2133

Viewsonic 2132

Voodoo 2132

Yamaha 2011

ZT Group 2132

HD DVD

Toshiba 21 36

iPod

Yamaha 5011

LD player

Yamaha 2002

Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004

TAPE DECK

Yamaha 5005, 5006

TUNER

Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009,

5010, 5012, 5014,

5015, 5016, 5017,

5018

Acer 0093

Acme 0207

Acura 0208

ADA 0255

ADC 0206

Admiral 0058, 0205, 0206,

0210, 0211

Adyson 0200, 0207

Agashi 0200

Agazi 0206

AGB 0204

Aiko 0127, 0200, 0207,

0208

Aiwa 0028, 0139, 0229,

0237

APPENDIX

Akai 0059, 0065, 0127,

0129, 0130, 0200,

0204, 0208, 0209,

0213, 0217, 0218,

0255

Akiba 0209, 0218

Akura 0206, 0209, 0218

Alaron 0200

Alba 0200, 0207, 0208,

0209, 0217, 0218

ALBIRAL 0212

Allstar 0213

Amplivision 0207

Amstrad 0204, 0206, 0208,

0209, 0218

Amtron 0062

Anam 0208

Anam National 0062

Anglo 0208

Anitech 0206, 0208

Ansonic 0203, 0208

AOC 0060, 0061

Apex 0118, 0122, 0132

Arc en Ciel 0216

Arcam 0200

Arcam Delta 0207

Aristona 0213, 0217

ASA 0205, 0211

Asberg 0213

Astra 0208

Asuka 0200, 0206, 0207,

0209, 0218

Atlantic 0200, 0207, 0213,

0217

Atori 0208

Audiosonic 0207, 0208, 0209,

0213, 0216, 0217,

0218

AudioTon 0207

Audiovox 0062

Autovox 0205, 0206, 0207

Awa 0200

Baird 0216

Bang & Olufsen 0205

Basic Line 0208, 0209, 0213,

0218

Bastide 0207

Baur 0217

Beko 0228

Belcor 0060

Bell & Howell 0058, 0064

Benq 0081

Beon 0213, 0217

Bestar 0213

Binatone 0207

Black Star 0214

Blaupunkt 0255

Blue Sky 0209, 0218

Bondstec 0214

Boots 0207

Bradford 0062

Brandt 0216, 0226

Brionvega 0205, 0213, 0217

Britannia 0200, 0207

Brockwood 0060

Broksonic 0138

Bruns 0205

BSR 0215

BTC 0209, 0218

Bush 0177, 0208, 0209,

0210, 0213, 0215,

0216, 0217, 0218,

0230, 0237

Candle 0060, 0061

Capsonic 0206

Cascade 0208

Cathay 0213, 0217

CCE 0127

Celebrity 0059

Centurion 0213, 0217

Century 0205

CGE 0214, 0215

Cimline 0208, 0218

Citizen 0060, 0061, 0062,

0064

City 0208

Clarivox 0212, 0217

Clatronic 0206, 0207, 0208,

0209, 0213, 0214,

0218

CMS 0200

Colortyme 0060, 0061

Concerto 0060, 0061

Concorde 0208

Condor 0200, 0207, 0213

Contec 0200, 0207, 0208

Contec/Cony 0062

Continental Edison

0216

Cosmel 0208

Craig 0062

Crosley 0205, 0214, 0215

Crown 0062, 0063, 0128,

0208, 0213, 0217

CS Electronics 0200, 0207, 0209,

0214, 0218

CTC 0214

Curtis Mathes 0057, 0060, 0061,

0064, 0065

CXC 0062

Cybertron 0209, 0218

Daewoo 0060, 0061, 0120,

0127, 0155, 0193,

0200, 0207, 0208,

0213, 0218, 0238

Dainichi 0200, 0209, 0218

Dansai 0200, 0206, 0213,

0217

Dantax 0217

Daytron 0060, 0061, 0208

De Graaf 0210

Decca 0204, 0207, 0213,

0217

Desmet 0213, 0217

Diamond 0200

Dimensia 0057

Dixi 0208, 0213, 0217

DTS 0208

Dual 0207, 0215, 0216

Dual-Tec 0207, 0208, 0215

Dumont 0060, 0127, 0205,

0207

Durabrand 0126

Dux 0217

Dynatron 0213, 0217

Elbe 0203, 0204, 0212,

0218

Elbe-Sharp 0204

Elcit 0204, 0205

ELECTRO TECH

0208

Electroband 0059

Electrohome 0059, 0060, 0061

Elin 0200, 0207, 0213,

0217

Elite 0209, 0213, 0218

Elman 0215

Elta 0200, 0208

Emerson 0060, 0061, 0062,

0064, 0128, 0205

Envision 0060, 0061

Erres 0213, 0217

ESA 0080

Etron 0208

Euro-Feel 0206

Euroline 0217

Euroman 0200

Euromann 0206, 0207, 0213

Europhon 0200, 0204, 0207,

0213, 0215

Fenner 0208

Ferguson 0212, 0217, 0226

Fidelity 0200, 0207, 0210

Finlandia 0210

Finlux 0204, 0205, 0207,

0213, 0215, 0217

Firstline 0200, 0207, 0208,

0213, 0214

Fisher 0064, 0127, 0128,

0205, 0207, 0215

Flint 0213, 0218

Formenti 0200, 0205, 0207,

0215, 0217

Formenti-Phoenix

0200

Fortress 0205

Frontech 0206, 0208, 0210,

0211, 0214

Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025,

0088, 0127

Funai 0033, 0034, 0035,

0036, 0037, 0062,

0206

Futuretech 0062

Gateway 0094

GBC 0208, 0215, 0218

GE 0057, 0060, 0061,

0122, 0147

GEC 0204, 0207, 0211,

0213, 0217

Geloso 0208, 0210, 0215

General Technic 0208

Genexxa 0209, 0211, 0213,

0218

Gibralter 0060

GoldHand 0200

GoldStar 0060, 0061, 0127,

0128, 0200, 0201,

0207, 0208, 0210,

0213, 0214, 0215,

0217

Goodmans 0171, 0201, 0204,

0206, 0208, 0213,

0217, 0240

GPM 0209, 0218

Graetz 0211

Granada 0204, 0207, 0210,

0213, 0217

Grandin 0208, 0209, 0217

Grundig 0128, 0130, 0222,

0236, 0255

Grunpy 0062

Halifax 0200, 0206, 0207

Hallmark 0060, 0061

Hampton 0200, 0207

Hanseatic 0203, 0207, 0208,

0213, 0215, 0217

Hantarex 0204, 0208

Harvard 0062

HCM 0206, 0207, 0208,

0218

Hifivox 0216

Higashi 0200

Hinari 0208, 0209, 0213,

0217, 0218

Hisawa 0209, 0218

Hitachi 0006, 0014, 0015,

0016, 0042, 0060,

0061, 0095, 0105,

0127, 0156, 0179,

0180, 0204, 0207,

0210, 0211, 0215,

0216, 0251

Hornyphon 0213

Hoshai 0209, 0218

Huanyu 0200, 0207

Hygashi 0200, 0207

Hyper 0200, 0207, 0208,

0214, 0215

Hypson 0206, 0207, 0213,

0217

ICE 0127, 0200, 0206,

0207, 0208, 0209,

0213, 0218

ICeS 0200, 0218

IMA 0062

Imperial 0211, 0213, 0214,

0215

Indiana 0213, 0217

Infinity 0063

Ingelen 0211

Ingersol 0208

Inno Hit 0201, 0204, 0207,

0208, 0209, 0213,

0217, 0218

Innovation 0206, 0208

Interbuy 0208, 0214

Interfunk 0205, 0211, 0213,

0214, 0216, 0217

International 0200

Intervision 0206, 0207, 0218

Irradio 0201, 0208, 0209,

0213, 0217, 0218

Isukai 0209, 0218

ITC 0207, 0215

ITS 0200, 0209, 0213,

0218

ITT 0129, 0208, 0211

ITV 0208, 0217

JBL 0063

JC Penney 0057, 0060, 0061

JCB 0059

Jensen 0060, 0061

JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,

0108, 0136, 0153,

0178, 0190, 0213,

0218

Kaisui 0200, 0207, 0208,

0209, 0218

Kamosonic 0207

Kamp 0200, 0207

Kapsch 0211

Karcher 0207, 0208, 0212,

0217

Kawasho 0059, 0060, 0061,

0200

Kendo 0128, 0210

Kennedy 0215

Kenwood 0060, 0061

Kingsley 0200, 0207

Kloss Novabeam

0062

Kneissel 0203

Kolster 0213

Konka 0209, 0218

Korpel 0213, 0217

Korting 0205

Koyoda 0208

KTV 0062, 0127, 0207

Kyoto 0200, 0212

Lenco 0208

Lenoir 0207, 0208

Lesa 0214

Leyco 0206, 0213, 0217

LG 0016, 0038, 0039,

0127, 0128, 0157,

0158, 0163, 0164,

0166, 0188, 0189,

0200, 0201, 0207,

0208, 0210, 0213,

0214, 0215, 0217

Liesenk 0217

Life 0206, 0208

Lifetec 0206, 0208, 0218

Loewe 0063, 0128, 0203,

0204, 0223, 0227

Loewe Opta 0205, 0213, 0217

Logik 0058

Luma 0210, 0217

Lumatron 0210, 0213, 0217

Lux May 0213

Luxman 0060, 0061

Luxor 0201, 0207, 0210

LXI 0057, 0061, 0063,

0064

Magnadyne 0204, 0205, 0214,

0215, 0217

Magnafon 0200, 0204, 0207

Magnavox 0060, 0061, 0063,

0102, 0103, 0150

Magnum 0206, 0208

Majestic 0058

Mandor 0206

Manesth 0206, 0207, 0213,

0217

Marantz 0060, 0061, 0063,

0090, 0213, 0217

Marelli 0205

Mark 0200, 0213, 0217

Matsui 0204, 0207, 0208,

0210, 0213, 0217

Mediator 0213, 0217

Medion 0206, 0208

Megatron 0061

Melectronic 0200, 0207, 0208,

0211, 0213, 0216,

0217

Memorex 0058, 0061, 0064,

0208

Memphis 0208

Metz 0205

MGA 0060, 0061

Micromaxx 0206, 0208

Microstar 0206, 0208

Minerva 0204

Minoka 0213

Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016,

0048, 0060, 0061,

0104, 0112, 0113,

0125, 0205, 0213

Mivar 0200, 0201, 0202,

0203, 0204, 0207

Montgomery Ward

0058

MTC 0060, 0061, 0128,

0200

Multi System 0217

Multitech 0062, 0127, 0128,

0200, 0207, 0208,

0210, 0214, 0215,

0217

Murphy 0200, 0207

NAD 0061

Naonis 0210

NEC 0026, 0053, 0060,

0061, 0096, 0127

Neckermann 0205, 0207, 0210,

0213, 0217, 0255

NEI 0213, 0217

Nesco 0214

NET-TV 0082, 0101

New Tech 0208, 0213

New World 0209, 0218

Nicamagic 0200, 0207

Nikkai 0200, 0206, 0207,

0209, 0213, 0217,

0218

Nikko 0061

Nobliko 0200, 0207

Nogamatic 0216

Nokia 0129, 0211

Nordmende 0205, 0211, 0213,

0216

Nordvision 0217

Oceanic 0211

Olevia 0084

ONCEAS 0207

Onwa 0062, 0218

Orbit 0213

Orion 0126, 0204, 0208,

0213, 0217, 0235

Orline 0218

Orsowe 0204

Osaki 0127, 0206, 0207,

0209, 0218

Osio 0201

Oso 0209, 0218

Osume 0218

Otto Versand 0204, 0207, 0213,

0215, 0216, 0217,

0255

Pael 0200, 0207

Palladium 0207

Panama 0200, 0206, 0207,

0208

Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0063,

0073, 0074, 0097,

0110, 0114, 0137,

0141, 0151, 0162,

0165, 0186, 0204,

0211, 0244, 0245,

0246, 0254

Pathe Cinema 0200, 0203, 0207,

0212, 0215

Pathe Marconi 0212, 0216

Pausa 0208

Perdio 0200

Philco 0060, 0061, 0063,

0128, 0205, 0214,

0215

Philharmonic 0207

Philips 0040, 0060, 0063,

0072, 0115, 0116,

0124, 0130, 0150,

0175, 0184, 0187,

0205, 0207, 0213,

0215, 0217, 0220,

0221, 0232, 0233,

0252, 0253

Philips Magnavox

0124

Phoenix 0200, 0205, 0213,

0217

Phonola 0200, 0205, 0213,

0217

Pilot 0060

Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0060,

0061, 0098, 0109,

0117, 0128, 0181,

0182, 0194, 0195,

0211, 0213, 0216,

0217, 0250

Plantron 0206, 0213

Polaroid 0075

Poppy 0208

Portland 0060, 0061

Prandoni-Prince 0204, 0210

Precision 0207

Prima 0208, 0211

Profex 0208

Profi-Tronic 0213

Proline 0213

Proscan 0057

Prosonic 0200, 0207, 0217

Protech 0206, 0207, 0208,

0213, 0214, 0215,

0217

Proton 0060, 0061

Provision 0217

Pulsar 0060

Pye 0213, 0217

Pymi 0208

Quasar 0152, 0214

Quelle 0201, 0206, 0207,

0213, 0214, 0215,

0217

Radialva 0218

Radio Shack 0064

Radio Shack/Realistic

0057, 0060, 0061,

0062, 0064

Radiola 0213, 0217

Radiomarelli 0204, 0205, 0214

Radiotone 0213

RCA 0057, 0060, 0061,

0091, 0133, 0135,

0147, 0149

Realistic 0064

Revox 0213, 0217

Rex 0206, 0210, 0211

RFT 0203, 0205

Rhapsody 0200

R-Line 0213, 0217

Roadstar 0206, 0208, 0209,

0218, 0237

Robotron 0205

Rowa 0200

RTF 0205

Saba 0204, 0205, 0211,

0216

saccs 0212

Saisho 0204, 0206, 0207,

0208

Salora 0201, 0204, 0210,

0211, 0215

Sambers 0204

Sampo 0060, 0061, 0083,

0101

Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031,

0032, 0044, 0045,

0046, 0047, 0060,

0061, 0065, 0068,

0069, 0071, 0079,

0087, 0127, 0128,

0130, 0144, 0160,

0161, 0170, 0176,

0183, 0185, 0200,

0201, 0206, 0207,

0208, 0213, 0217,

0239, 0241, 0242,

0243

Sandra 0200, 0207

Sansui 0123, 0126, 0213

Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022,

0049, 0060, 0064,

0127, 0128, 0200,

0203, 0207, 0215

SBR 0217

SCHAUB LORENTZ

0211

Schneider 0207, 0209, 0213,

0215, 0216, 0217,

0218

Scotch 0061

Scott 0060, 0061, 0062

Sears 0057, 0060, 0061,

0064

SEG 0200, 0206, 0207,

0214, 0215, 0217

SEI 0204

SEI-Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0211

Seleco 0210, 0211, 0215

Sencora 0208

Sentra 0218

Serino 0200

Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011,

0060, 0061, 0066,

0070, 0087, 0111,

0143, 0145, 0167,

0168, 0169, 0198,

0204, 0224, 0247,

0248, 0249

Shogun 0060

Siarem 0204, 0205, 0215

Sicatel 0212

Siemens 0255

Sierra 0213

Signature 0058

Silva 0200

Singer 0205, 0214, 0215

Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0215,

0217

Skantic 0211

Solavox 0211

Sonoko 0206, 0207, 0208,

0213, 0217

Sonolor 0211

Sontec 0213, 0217

Sony 0041, 0059, 0067,

0085, 0086, 0174,

0196, 0199, 0208,

0219, 0234

Sound & Vision 0209, 0218

Soundesign 0060, 0061, 0062

Soundwave 0213, 0217

SSS 0060, 0062

Standard 0207, 0208, 0209,

0213, 0218

Starlight 0217

Starlite 0062

Stenway 0218

Stern 0210, 0211

Sunkai 0208, 0218

Sunwood 0208, 0213

Superla 0200, 0204, 0207

SuperTech 0200

Supra 0208

Supreme 0059

Susumu 0209

Sutron 0208

Sydney 0200, 0207

Sylvania 0060, 0061, 0063,

0080, 0134, 0142,

0148

Symphonic 0062, 0080

Sysline 0217

Sytong 0200

APPENDIX

Tandy 0127, 0207, 0209,

0211, 0218

Tashiko 0200, 0207, 0210

Tatung 0127, 0204, 0207,

0213, 0217, 0237

TCM 0206, 0208

Teac 0127

Tec 0207, 0208, 0214,

0215

Techwood 0060, 0061

Teknika 0058, 0060, 0061,

0062

Teleavia 0216

Telecor 0218

Telefunken 0065, 0213, 0216

Telegazi 0218

Teletech 0208, 0214, 0217

Teleton 0207

Televideon 0200

Tensai 0208, 0209, 0213,

0218

Tesmet 0213

Tevion 0206, 0208

Texet 0200, 0207

Thomson 0191, 0192, 0207,

0213, 0216, 0226

Thorn 0212, 0217

TMK 0060, 0061

Tokai 0213

Tokyo 0200, 0207

Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053,

0054, 0064, 0078,

0089, 0090, 0106,

0107, 0127, 0131,

0140, 0146, 0159,

0197, 0225, 0231,

0237

Towada 0211, 0215

Transtec 0200

Trident 0204

Tristar 0218

Triumph 0204

Uher 0211, 0213

Ultravox 0200, 0205, 0207,

0214, 0215

United 0217

Universum 0127, 0128, 0129,

0201, 0206, 0213,

0214, 0215, 0217

Univox 0212

Vestel 0210, 0211, 0213,

0214, 0215, 0217

Vexa 0208, 0217

Victor 0213

VIDEOLOGIC 0200

Videologique 0200, 0207, 0209,

0218

Videosat 0214

VideoSystem 0213

Videotechnic 0200

Vidtech 0060, 0061

Viewsonic 0076, 0077, 0092,

0099, 0172, 0173

Visiola 0200, 0207

Vision 0213

Vortec 0213, 0217

Voxson 0205, 0210, 0211,

0213

Waltham 0207, 0212

Wards 0057, 0058, 0060,

0061, 0063

Watson 0213, 0217, 0218

Watt Radio 0200, 0207, 0212,

0215

Wega 0205

Weltblick 0213, 0217

Weston 0215

White Westinghouse

0200, 0207, 0217

Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002,

0003, 0004, 0005,

0060, 0061

Yami sh i 0 21 8

Yoko 0200, 0206, 0207,

0208, 0209, 0213,

0217, 0218

Yorx 0209, 0218

Zanussi 0210

Zenith 0058, 0060, 0100,

0105, 0119, 0121,

0154

TV/DVD

Aiwa 0139, 2055

Apex 0132, 2049

Broksonic 0138, 2060

Bush 0230, 2112

JVC 0136, 2053

Panasonic 0137, 0254, 2054,

2110

RCA 0133, 0135, 2050,

2051

Sylvania 0134, 2052

Thomson 0226, 2109

Toshiba 0131, 0231, 2048,

2111

TV/DVD/VCR

Panasonic 0141, 1040, 2057

Samsung 0241, 1070, 2113

Sharp 0143, 1028, 2059

Sylvania 0142, 1041, 2058

Toshiba 0140, 1029, 2056

TV/VCR

Aiwa 0237, 1066

Bush 0237, 1066

Daewoo 0155, 0238, 1038,

1067

GE 0147, 1030

Goodmans 0240, 1069

Grundig 0236, 1062

Hitachi 0156, 1039

JVC 0153, 1036

Magnavox 0150, 1033

Orion 0235, 1065

Panasonic 0151, 1034

Philips 0150, 0232, 0233,

1033, 1062, 1063

Quasar 0152, 1035

RCA 0149, 1032

Roadstar 0237, 1066

Samsung 0144, 0239, 1027,

1068

Sharp 0145, 1028

Sony 0234, 1064

Sylvania 0148, 1031

Tatung 0237, 1066

Toshiba 0146, 0237, 1029,

1066

Zenith 0154, 1037

VCR

Admiral 1008, 1013

Adventura 1005

Aiwa 1005, 1042, 1043,

1044, 1066

Akai 1007, 1043

Akiba 1050

Akura 1043, 1050

Alba 1044, 1050

American High 1004

Amstrad 1042

Anitech 1050

ASA 1045, 1046

Asha 1002, 1014

Asuka 1042, 1045, 1046,

1050

Audio Dynamics1000

Audiovox 1003

Baird 1042, 1043, 1047

Basic Line 1044, 1050

Baur 1046

Beaumark 1002, 1014

Bell & Howell 1001

Blaupunkt 1046, 1048

Broksonic 1012, 1013

Bush 1044, 1050, 1066

Calix 1003

Candle 1002, 1003

Canon 1004

CCE 1006

CGE 1042, 1043

Cimline 1044, 1050

Citizen 1002, 1003

Colortyme 1000

Colt 1006

Craig 1002, 1003, 1006,

1014

Crown 1050

Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002, 1004,

1009

Cybernex 1002, 1014

Daewoo 1005, 1038, 1061,

1067

Dansai 1050

Dantax 1044

DBX 1000

De Graaf 1046, 1049

Decca 1042, 1043, 1046

Denon 1010

Dimensia 1009

Dual 1043, 1046

Dumont 1042, 1046, 1047,

1049

Dynatech 1005

Electrohome 1003

Electrophonic 1003

Elta 1050

Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005,

1012, 1013

Etzuko 1050

Ferguson 1043

Fidelity 1042

Finlandia 1046, 1047, 1049

Finlux 1042, 1043, 1046,

1047, 1049

FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049,

1050

Fisher 1001, 1047

Flint 1044

Formenti/Phoenix

1046

Fuji 1004

Fujitsu 1042

Funai 1005, 1042

Galaxy 1042

Garrard 1005

GBC 1050

GE 1002, 1004, 1009,

1014, 1030

GEC 1046

Geloso 1050

General Technic 1044, 1048

Go Video 1014

GoldHand 1050

Goldstar 1000, 1003, 1042,

1045

Goodmans 1042, 1045, 1050,

1069

Gradiente 1005

Graetz 1043, 1047

Granada 1046, 1047, 1049

Grandin 1042, 1045, 1050

Grundig 1046, 1050, 1062

Hanseatic 1045, 1046

Harley Davidson1005

Harman/Kardon 1000

Harwood 1006

HCM 1050

Headquarter 1001

Hinari 1044, 1050

Hisawa 1044

Hitachi 1007, 1010, 1039,

1042, 1043, 1046,

1049

Hughes Network Systems

1010

Hypson 1044, 1050

Imperial 1042

Inno Hit 1046, 1050

Innovation 1044, 1048

Instant Replay 1004

Interbuy 1045

Interfunk 1046, 1047

Intervision 1042

Irradio 1045, 1050

ITT 1043, 1047

ITV 1045

JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002,

1003, 1004, 1006

JCL 1004

Jensen 1007

JVC 1000, 1001, 1007,

1011, 1017, 1036,

1043

Kaisui 1050

Karcher 1046

Kendo 1044

Kenwood 1000, 1001, 1007,

1011, 1043

KLH 1006

Kodak 1003, 1004

Korpel 1050

Leyco 1050

LG 1003, 1042, 1045,

1071

Lifetec 1044, 1048

Lloyd's 1005

Loewe 1048

Loewe Opta 1045, 1046

Logik 1006, 1050

Luxor 1047

LXI 1003

M Electronic 1042

Magnasonic 1047

Magnavox 1004, 1018, 1033

Magnin 1003, 1014

Manesth 1050

Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004,

1046, 1051

Marta 1003

Matsui 1044, 1045

Matsushita 1004

Mediator 1046

Medion 1044, 1048

MEI 1004

vii

Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1008,

1013, 1014, 1042,

1045, 1047

Memphis 1050

Metz 1048

MGA 1014

MGN Technology

1002, 1014

Micromaxx 1044, 1048

Microstar 1044, 1048

Migros 1042

Minolta 1010

Mitsubishi 1011, 1042, 1046

Montgomery Ward

1008

Motorola 1004, 1008

MTC 1002, 1014

Multitech 1002, 1005, 1006,

1042, 1046, 1050

Murphy 1042

National 1048

NEC 1000, 1001, 1007,

1011, 1043, 1051

Neckermann 1043, 1046

NEI 1046

Nesco 1050

Nikko 1003

Noblex 1002, 1014

Nokia 1043, 1047

Nordmende 1043

Oceanic 1042, 1043

Okano 1044

Olympus 1004

Optimus 1003, 1008

Orion 1012, 1013, 1044,

1065

Orson 1042

Osaki 1042, 1045, 1050

Otto Versand 1046

Palladium 1043, 1045, 1050

Panasonic 1004, 1020, 1034,

1040, 1048, 1054,

1072

Pathe Marconi 1043

Penney 1010, 1014

Pentax 1010, 1049

Perdio 1042

Philco 1004, 1051

Philips 1004, 1025, 1033,

1046, 1056, 1057,

1059, 1062, 1063

Philips Magnavox

1018

Phonola 1046

Pilot 1003

Pioneer 1011, 1046

Prinz 1042

Profex 1050

Profitronic 1014

Proline 1042

Proscan 1009

Prosonic 1044

Protec 1006

Pye 1046, 1056

Quarter 1001

Quartz 1001, 1047

Quasar 1004, 1035

Quelle 1042, 1046, 1047

Radio Shack 1003

Radio Shack/Realistic

1001, 1002, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1008

Radiola 1046

Radix 1003

Randex 1003

RCA 1002, 1004, 1009,

1010, 1014, 1015,

1022, 1032

Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1008

Rex 1043

RFT 1046

Roadstar 1045, 1050, 1066

Saba 1043

Saisho 1044, 1050

Salora 1047

Samsung 1002, 1014, 1021,

1027, 1052, 1068,

1070

Sanky 1008

Sansui 1007, 1011, 1013,

1043

Sanyo 1001, 1002, 1014,

1047

SBR 1046

Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047

Schneider 1042, 1044, 1045,

1046, 1050

Scott 1012

Sears 1001, 1003, 1004,

1010

SEG 1050

SEI-Sinudyne 1046

Seleco 1043

Sentron 1050

Sharp 1008, 1023, 1028,

1053, 1073

Shintom 1006, 1047, 1050

Shivaki 1045

Shogun 1002, 1014

Siemens 1045, 1047

Signature 2000 1008

Silva 1045

Singer 1004, 1006

Sinudyne 1046

Sontec 1045

Sony 1016, 1019, 1055,

1060, 1064, 1074

STS 1004, 1010

Sunkai 1044

Sunstar 1042

Suntronic 1042

Sunwood 1050

Sylvania 1004, 1005, 1031,

1041

Symphonic 1005

Taisho 1044

Tandy 1001

Tashiko 1003, 1042

Tatung 1007, 1042, 1043,

1046, 1066

TCM 1044, 1048

Teac 1005, 1007

Technics 1004, 1048

Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005

Teleavia 1043

Telefunken 1043

Tenosal 1050

Tensai 1042, 1045, 1050

Tevion 1044, 1048

Thomson 1043, 1058

Thorn 1043, 1047

TMK 1002, 1014

Tokai 1045, 1050

Tonsai 1050

Toshiba 1013, 1024, 1029,

1043, 1046, 1066,

1075

Totevision 1002, 1003, 1014

Towada 1050

Towika 1050

Uher 1045

Unitech 1002, 1014

Universum 1042, 1045, 1046

Vector Research 1000

Video Concepts 1000

Videon 1044, 1048

Videosonic 1002, 1014

Wards 1002, 1003, 1004,

1005, 1006, 1008,

1010, 1014

Weltblick 1045

White Westinghouse

1013

XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006

Yamaha 1000, 1001, 1007

Yamishi 1050

Yokan 1050

Yoko 1045, 1050

Zenith 1013, 1026, 1037

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

HTR-6160

Printed in Malaysia WN25460

HTR-6160

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

HTR-6160_U-cv.fm Page 1 Monday, December 10, 2007 2:07 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.

■ Front panel

HTR-6160

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

TONE CONTROLSYSTEM OFF STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT

SCENE

AUDIO SELECT

EFFECT

PROGRAM INPUT

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

PRESET/TUNING/CHBANDSPEAKERS MEMORY

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

1234

OPTIMIZER MIC

AUDIO OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

VIDEOS VIDEO

VOLUME

INFO

BCD E FGHI J

KL M NO PQ R S

00_sheet_HTR-6160_U.book Page 1 Monday, December 10, 2007 2:19 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

■ Remote control

REC

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

PARAMETER

MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

ENHANCER

l PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

MUTE

POWER

4321

ENT

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

VCR B

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

MEMORY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

AXMSIRIUS

INFO

WN67540

Printed in Malaysia

00_sheet_HTR-6160_U.book Page i Monday, December 10, 2007 2:19 PM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Yamaha HTR-6160 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: HTR-6160

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Descargar PDF

informe

en otros idiomas

français: Yamaha HTR-6160 Le manuel du propriétaire
italiano: Yamaha HTR-6160 Manuale del proprietario
English: Yamaha HTR-6160 Owner's manual
Deutsch: Yamaha HTR-6160 Bedienungsanleitung
русский: Yamaha HTR-6160 Инструкция по применению
Nederlands: Yamaha HTR-6160 de handleiding
português: Yamaha HTR-6160 Manual do proprietário
dansk: Yamaha HTR-6160 Brugervejledning
polski: Yamaha HTR-6160 Instrukcja obsługi
čeština: Yamaha HTR-6160 Návod k obsluze
svenska: Yamaha HTR-6160 Bruksanvisning
Türkçe: Yamaha HTR-6160 El kitabı
suomi: Yamaha HTR-6160 Omistajan opas
română: Yamaha HTR-6160 Manualul proprietarului

Yamaha HTR-6160 El manual del propietario

Yamaha HTR-6160 El manual del propietario

en otros idiomas

Artículos relacionados

Otros documentos